Hmiwebdisplaybuildingguide Eng 5m3d44
This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report r6l17
Overview 4q3b3c
& View Hmiwebdisplaybuildingguide Eng as PDF for free.
More details 26j3b
- Words: 40,892
- Pages: 181
Experion PKS
HMIWeb Display Building Guide
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide Release: System Release 711 01/2009 HMIWebDisplayBuildingGuide_Eng.doc
Section:
8-
Notices, Copyright, and Trademarks While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreements with and for its customers. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice. © Copyright 1989 – 2007 by Honeywell Oy. No part of this publication may be reproduced or translated, stored in a database or retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Honeywell Oy. Experion ® Process Knowledge System (PKS) is a ed trademark of Honeywell International Inc. All other brand or product names mentioned in the document are trademarks of their respective owners. Honeywell Oy Viestikatu 1-3 FIN-70600 Kuopio, Finland Phone +358 20752 2000 Telefax +358 20752 2400 http://www.honeywell.fi
Contents 1
Getting Started 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
1.9
2
1
The Basics ................................................................................................................................1 Starting HMIWeb Display Builder ......................................................................................1 Layout of the main window .................................................................................................1 Toolbars ...................................................................................................................................3 1.4.1 Displaying/hiding toolbars....................................................................................3 1.4.2 Standard Toolbar .....................................................................................................3 1.4.3 PMD toolbox Toolbar ..............................................................................................4 1.4.4 Toolbox Toolbar .......................................................................................................7 1.4.5 Arrange Toolbar .......................................................................................................8 1.4.6 View Toolbar ............................................................................................................9 1.4.7 Transform Toolbar .................................................................................................10 1.4.8 Format Toolbar.......................................................................................................10 1.4.9 Drawing Toolbar ....................................................................................................11 1.4.10 Scripting Toolbar....................................................................................................12 Object Explorer.....................................................................................................................12 Point Browser .......................................................................................................................13 Properties Window ..............................................................................................................14 PMD Display Object Library ..............................................................................................16 1.8.1 Naming of the shapes............................................................................................17 1.8.2 Dynamic Shapes.....................................................................................................18 1.8.3 Static shapes............................................................................................................23 Shape Gallery........................................................................................................................29
Creating Displays 2.1 2.2
2.3 2.4
2.5
2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11
31
Display Types .......................................................................................................................31 Creating a standard display ...............................................................................................31 2.2.1 Creating a display from a Web Page ...................................................................32 2.2.2 Saving a display .....................................................................................................32 Creating a popup or faceplate ............................................................................................33 Creating a Shape Sequence .................................................................................................34 2.4.1 Using a Shape Sequence as a Status Indicator ...................................................36 2.4.2 Using a Shape Sequence as an Animation..........................................................37 2.4.3 Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display.........................................................37 Creating a Dynamic Shape .................................................................................................38 2.5.1 Custom Properties .................................................................................................38 2.5.2 Dynamic Objects ....................................................................................................38 2.5.3 Creating a Dynamic Shape ...................................................................................38 2.5.4 Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display .........................................................40 2.5.5 Example of a dynamic shape................................................................................41 Creating a Point Detail (Template) Display .....................................................................43 Embedding a linked shape .................................................................................................45 Upgrading an Embedded Shape........................................................................................45 Guidelines for Optimizing Display Performance............................................................46 2.9.1 Display-creation Guidelines .................................................................................46 About display templates .....................................................................................................47 About archive format ..........................................................................................................48
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Contents • 8 - i
2.12
2.13
3
Drawing Techniques 3.1 3.2 3.3
3.4
3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16
3.17 3.18
3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24
4
55
Drawing Techniques - overview........................................................................................55 Setting Drawing Defaults....................................................................................................55 Creating Objects ...................................................................................................................56 3.3.1 Creating a Bezier Curve ........................................................................................57 3.3.2 Creating a new object from overlapping objects ...............................................58 Selecting Objects...................................................................................................................59 3.4.1 Selection handles....................................................................................................60 3.4.2 Reference Object.....................................................................................................60 3.4.3 Deselecting Objects ................................................................................................60 Deleting Objects ...................................................................................................................60 Resizing Objects ...................................................................................................................61 Duplicating Objects..............................................................................................................61 Locking Objects ....................................................................................................................61 Aligning Objects...................................................................................................................62 Distributing Objects .............................................................................................................62 Grouping Objects .................................................................................................................63 Flipping Objects ...................................................................................................................64 Rotating Objects ...................................................................................................................64 Combining objects to improve display performance......................................................64 Changing the Stacking Order .............................................................................................65 Using the Node Editor.........................................................................................................66 3.16.1 Editing an Object’s Nodes.....................................................................................66 3.16.2 Adding a Node.......................................................................................................66 3.16.3 Editing an Object’s Curve Control Handles.......................................................67 Moving Objects with the Arrow Keys...............................................................................67 Defining an object’s color....................................................................................................68 3.18.1 Selecting a Non-standard Color...........................................................................68 3.18.2 Applying a Gradient Fill .......................................................................................69 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants......................................................................69 Undoing Your Work ............................................................................................................71 Inserting a Graphic ..............................................................................................................71 3.20.1 About graphic formats ..........................................................................................72 Inserting Text from Another Application.........................................................................73 Inserting an ActiveX Document.........................................................................................74 Inserting an ActiveX Control..............................................................................................74 URL Formats.........................................................................................................................75
PMD Object Properties 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6
ii • Contents
PMD Display Data Validation............................................................................................49 2.12.1 General ....................................................................................................................49 2.12.2 Validate the active display....................................................................................49 2.12.3 Validate displays in a directory ...........................................................................51 Tools for PMD displays.......................................................................................................52 2.13.1 Setting the department name with HDBSetDeptDisplays tool .......................52 2.13.2 Resaving the displays with HDBOpenSaveDisplays tool ................................53
76
PMD Object Properties – overview ...................................................................................76 Animation Tab......................................................................................................................76 Behaviors Tab .......................................................................................................................77 Colors Tab .............................................................................................................................78 Custom Properties Tab........................................................................................................79 PMD Data Tab ......................................................................................................................79 4.6.1 Static objects............................................................................................................81 4.6.2 Hyperlink ................................................................................................................82 4.6.3 Filled Rectangle ......................................................................................................82 4.6.4 Filled Oval...............................................................................................................83 HMIWeb Display Building Guide HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.7
4.8
4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12
4.6.5 Filled Polygon.........................................................................................................83 4.6.6 Blinking rectangle ..................................................................................................84 4.6.7 Numerical Output..................................................................................................85 4.6.8 Numerical Entry.....................................................................................................85 4.6.9 Text Output.............................................................................................................86 4.6.10 Conditional Text Output.......................................................................................87 4.6.11 Text Entry................................................................................................................87 4.6.12 Entry ......................................................................................................88 4.6.13 Signal Controlled Text...........................................................................................88 4.6.14 Bar ............................................................................................................................89 4.6.15 PistonBar .................................................................................................................90 4.6.16 Profile.......................................................................................................................91 4.6.17 Table.........................................................................................................................92 4.6.18 Mode ........................................................................................................................93 4.6.19 One-way Motor or One-way Motor (Pump) ......................................................94 4.6.20 Two-way Motor or Two-speed Motor ................................................................94 4.6.21 Valve ........................................................................................................................95 4.6.22 Three-way Valve ....................................................................................................96 4.6.23 Vertical Spindle Valve or Motor Valve ...............................................................96 4.6.24 Device Control 2/2 ................................................................................................97 4.6.25 Device Control 3/4 ................................................................................................98 4.6.26 General Logic..........................................................................................................98 4.6.27 Binary.......................................................................................................................99 4.6.28 Binary Button..........................................................................................................99 4.6.29 Signal Button ........................................................................................................100 4.6.30 Checkbox (FC data) .............................................................................................100 4.6.31 Combobox (FC data)............................................................................................100 4.6.32 Insert ActiveX Document....................................................................................101 4.6.33 Insert Picture from file.........................................................................................101 4.6.34 Insert Shape from File..........................................................................................101 4.6.35 Insert ActiveX Control.........................................................................................101 4.6.36 Alphanumeric (FC data) .....................................................................................101 4.6.37 Indicator (FC data)...............................................................................................102 PMD Blocks Tab .................................................................................................................102 4.7.1 Changing the department name for the data connections .............................103 4.7.2 Changing (Replace) the block names for the data connections .....................104 4.7.3 Changing (Rename) the block names for the data connections.....................105 Details Tab ..........................................................................................................................107 4.8.1 Static Pushbutton .................................................................................................107 4.8.2 Hyperlink ..............................................................................................................107 4.8.3 Numerical Output................................................................................................108 4.8.4 Numerical Entry...................................................................................................109 4.8.5 Text Output...........................................................................................................109 4.8.6 Conditional Text Output.....................................................................................110 4.8.7 Text Entry..............................................................................................................111 4.8.8 Entry ....................................................................................................112 4.8.9 Bar ..........................................................................................................................112 4.8.10 PistonBar ...............................................................................................................113 4.8.11 Checkbox (FC data) .............................................................................................113 4.8.12 Insert ActiveX Document....................................................................................113 4.8.13 Insert Picture from File........................................................................................114 4.8.14 Insert Shape from File..........................................................................................114 4.8.15 Alphanumeric (FC data) .....................................................................................114 4.8.16 Indicator (FC data)...............................................................................................116 Entry Tab.............................................................................................................................116 Font Tab...............................................................................................................................117 General Tab.........................................................................................................................118 Lines Tab .............................................................................................................................119
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Contents • 8 - iii
4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18
4.19
5
EPKS Object Properties 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
5.7 5.8
5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 iv • Contents
Link Tab...............................................................................................................................120 Popup Tab ...........................................................................................................................120 Signal Tab............................................................................................................................121 Task Tab ..............................................................................................................................121 Toggle Tab...........................................................................................................................122 Profile object Design Guide ..............................................................................................122 4.18.1 General Tab...........................................................................................................122 4.18.2 PMD Data Tab ......................................................................................................122 4.18.3 PMD Blocks Tab ...................................................................................................124 4.18.4 Series Tab ..............................................................................................................125 4.18.5 Title Tab.................................................................................................................126 4.18.6 Legend Tab ...........................................................................................................127 4.18.7 Tab...............................................................................................................128 4.18.8 Left Axis Tab / Bottom Axis Tab.......................................................................129 4.18.9 Walls Tab...............................................................................................................130 4.18.10 Selectors Tab .........................................................................................................131 Table object Design Guide ................................................................................................131 4.19.1 General Tab...........................................................................................................131 4.19.2 PMD Data Tab ......................................................................................................132 4.19.3 PMD Blocks Tab ...................................................................................................136 4.19.4 Font Tab.................................................................................................................136 4.19.5 Value Format Tab.................................................................................................136 4.19.6 Appearance Tab ...................................................................................................137 4.19.7 ColRow Tab ..........................................................................................................137 4.19.8 Settings Tab...........................................................................................................138
139
EPKS Object Properties – overview.................................................................................139 Animation Tab....................................................................................................................139 Behaviors Tab .....................................................................................................................140 Colors Tab ...........................................................................................................................141 Custom Properties Tab......................................................................................................141 Data Tab ..............................................................................................................................141 5.6.1 Defining a Link To a Point..................................................................................142 5.6.2 Defining a Link to a Database File.....................................................................142 Data Tab (Alarm table)......................................................................................................143 Details Tab ..........................................................................................................................144 5.8.1 ActiveX Document...............................................................................................144 5.8.2 Alarm table ...........................................................................................................144 5.8.3 Alphanumeric.......................................................................................................145 5.8.4 Chart ......................................................................................................................146 5.8.5 Checkbox...............................................................................................................146 5.8.6 Combobox .............................................................................................................146 5.8.7 Hyperlink ..............................................................................................................147 5.8.8 Indicator ................................................................................................................147 5.8.9 Push button...........................................................................................................147 5.8.10 Shape......................................................................................................................148 Filters Tab............................................................................................................................148 Font Tab...............................................................................................................................149 General Tab.........................................................................................................................149 Lines Tab .............................................................................................................................150 Options Tab.........................................................................................................................150 Popup Tab ...........................................................................................................................150 Acronyms ............................................................................................................................151 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms .............................................................................................152 Sorting tab ...........................................................................................................................152 About vector graphic objects ............................................................................................153 HMIWeb Display Building Guide HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.18 5.19
6
Display Properties 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7
6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12
7
159
Display Properties – overview .........................................................................................159 Appearance Tab .................................................................................................................159 Callup Task Tab..................................................................................................................160 Custom Properties Tab......................................................................................................161 Details Tab ..........................................................................................................................161 General Tab.........................................................................................................................162 Help Tab ..............................................................................................................................162 6.7.1 Specifying a Topic in a HTML Help File ..........................................................162 6.7.2 Specifying Help Other Than HTML Help ........................................................163 Keys Tab ..............................................................................................................................163 Periodic Task Tab...............................................................................................................164 PMD Blocks.........................................................................................................................165 PMD General ......................................................................................................................166 Shortcut Menu Tab ............................................................................................................167
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder 7.1
7.2 7.3 7.4
8
About alarm and event tables ..........................................................................................153 About trends .......................................................................................................................154 5.19.1 Chart area..............................................................................................................155 5.19.2 Axis ........................................................................................................................157 5.19.3 Toolbar...................................................................................................................158 5.19.4 Legend ...................................................................................................................158
168
Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options) ..................................168 7.1.1 General Tab...........................................................................................................168 7.1.2 Grids and Rulers Tab...........................................................................................169 7.1.3 Shapes Tab ............................................................................................................170 Creating a Toolbar (Tools / Customize).........................................................................171 Keyboard Shortcuts ...........................................................................................................172 Shortcut Menu ....................................................................................................................173
Distributing Displays 8.1 8.2
174
Display Storage Techniques .............................................................................................174 Distribution Issues .............................................................................................................174
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Contents • 8 - v
1
Getting Started
1.1
The Basics HMIWeb Display Builder is a specialized drawing application that enables you to create Web-based custom displays. These displays are operated via the system's Interfaces (Station). This document contains instructions for the HMIWeb Display Builder that is used to create custom displays for the Experion PKS with PMD Controller automation system. Custom displays allow you to present information in a sophisticated and -friendly manner — well-designed custom displays make it easier for operators to visualize complex processes, and reduce the probability of operator errors.
1.2
Starting HMIWeb Display Builder To start HMIWeb Display Builder on the server: From the Start menu, select Start / Programs / Honeywell Experion PKS / Server / HMIWeb Display Builder. To start HMIWeb Display Builder on the client computer: From the Start menu, select Start / Programs / Honeywell Experion PKS / Client Software / HMIWeb Display Builder.
1.3
Layout of the main window The following pictures show a typical layout.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 1
In the HMIWeb Display Builder:
8 - 2 • Getting Started
•
The display(s) you are editing appears on the right.
•
The Object Explorer which lists all objects in the display, appears on the left.
•
The Point Browser which displays every point that has been defined on the server to which you are connected, appears on the left
•
The toolbars appear at the top and bottom of the window.
•
The “floating” Properties window shows the properties of the selected object (or the display itself).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
1.4
Toolbars The toolbars provide speedy access to many functions.
1.4.1
Displaying/hiding toolbars To display (or hide) a toolbar: 1.
Select Tools / Customize and click the Toolbars tab to see the list of toolbars. A check mark opposite a toolbar indicates that it is already visible.
2.
Select the toolbars you want to display or hide.
3.
If necessary, drag the toolbar to a convenient location. (If you drag a toolbar to the top or bottom of the window, it will “dock” to the window’s border.)
If you want to create your own toolbar, see 7.2 Creating a Toolbar (Tools / Customize).
1.4.2
Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar includes basic Windows-related buttons such as Open and Save.
Button
Description New Display. Creates a new display. Click the arrow to the right to display the list of display types. See 2.1 Display Types. Open. Opens an existing display. Save. Saves the current display. Save All. Saves all open displays.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 3
Button
Description Cut. Removes the selected object(s) from the display and copies them to the clipboard. Copy. Copies the selected object(s) to the clipboard. Paste. Pastes the clipboard’s contents into the display. Duplicate. Makes duplicates of the selected object(s). Delete. Deletes the selected object(s). Undo. Undoes changes you have made to the display. See 3.19 Undoing Your Work. Redo. Redoes changes you have undone. Print. Prints the display. Print Preview. Shows the display, as it will print. You can then either print the display by clicking Print, or return to editing mode by clicking Close. Preview. Shows the display, as it will appear in Station. Preview also allows you to test scripts, providing the scripts do not require interaction with the server. For example, clicking an object will run the object’s onclick script. Click Close to return to the normal editing mode.
1.4.3
PMD toolbox Toolbar Note! You use the PMD Toolbox toolbar when the system to be defined is a "pure" Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. If the system contains EPKS integration, you'll have to use the Toolbox toolbar, which contains both PMD object creation buttons and EPKS object creation buttons. The PMD Toolbox toolbar contains two types of buttons: •
Editing Buttons (used to edit existing objects)
•
Object-creation Buttons (used to create objects)
Editing Buttons Button
Description Pointer. The main tool you use to select, move and resize objects. See 3.4 Selecting Objects. Zoomer. Zooms in and of the display. To zoom in on a part of the display, first click Zoomer and then click the area of interest. You can zoom in further by clicking repeatedly. To zoom out, hold down SHIFT and click. Rotator. Rotates the selected object(s). See 3.13 Rotating Objects.
8 - 4 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description Node Editor. Allows you to change the shape of an object by moving or adding individual nodes (apexes or reference points). See 3.16 Using the Node Editor.
Object-creation Buttons To see how to use these buttons, see 3.3 Creating Objects. Button
Description Static Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square. Static Rounded Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square with rounded corners. Static Oval. Creates an oval or circle. Static Line. Creates a straight line. Static Polyline. Creates a multi-segment line (which is similar to polygon, but with one open side). To create a polyline, click to mark each node, except for the last, which you mark by double-clicking. Static Polygon. Creates a polygon. To create a polygon, you click to mark each node, except for the last. You mark the last node by double-clicking, which then closes the polygon. Static Bezier Curve. Creates a smooth-curved line. See 3.3.1 Creating a Bezier Curve. Static Arc. Creates an arc (a quarter of an oval or circle). Static Wedge. Creates a segment (quarter) of an oval or a circle. Static Textbox. Creates a box where you can write the text. Static Pushbutton. Creates a button that can activate in the interface (Station) to perform specified functions (behaviors). Hyperlink. Creates a hyperlink. When a clicks the hyperlink in the interface (Station) calls up the URL (such as a Web page) or display that you specify in the Details Tab of the object. Filled Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square and fills the area with the desired color(s). Filled Oval. Creates an oval or circle and fills the area with the desired color(s). Filled Polygon. Creates a polygon and fills the area with the desired color(s). Blinking rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square, which blinks between two colors, if the Blink property is on. Numerical Output. Creates a field, which outputs a value with engineering unit and shows alarm and warning states with colors. Numerical Entry. Creates a field, which allows data entry in the interface. The field shows the value with engineering unit as well as the alarm and warning states with colors. Text Output. Creates a field which outputs text. Conditional Text Output. Creates a field which outputs text conditionally according to the definitions. Text Entry. Creates a field, which outputs text and allows text entry in the interface.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 5
Button
Description Entry. Creates a field, which allows the entry in the interface. Shows asterisks (********) instead of 's characters. Signal controlled Text. Creates a field which outputs static or blinking text controlled by a signal. Bar. Shows a process value by means of a bar or pointer indicator inside the field. The indicator type and moving direction (horizontally/vertically) are defined in the Details Tab. PistonBar Shows two process values graphically overlapping. The second indicator starts always from the "top" of the first indicator and grows to the opposite direction. Profile. Creates a graph, which can show 1-6 values as curves, bars, color arrays or areas. See 4.18 Profile object Design Guide. Table. Creates a table, which can show text, numeric and Boolean arrays. s also data entry. See 4.19 Table object Design Guide. Mode. Outputs the mode text. Property for mode text visibility. One-way Motor. Outputs the symbol for one-way motor. One-way Motor (pump). Outputs the pump symbol. Two-way Motor. Outputs the symbol for two-way motor. Two-speed Motor. Outputs the symbol for two-speed motor. Valve. Outputs the valve symbol. Three-way Valve. Outputs the symbol for three-way valve. Vertical Spindle Valve. Outputs the symbol for vertical spindle valve. Motor Valve. Outputs the symbol for motor valve. Device Control 2/2. Outputs the symbol for 2/2 device control. Device Control 4/3. Outputs the symbol for 4/3 device control. General Logic. Outputs the symbol for general logic. Binary. Outputs the symbol for binary data control. Binary Button. Creates a button that s can click to change the signal status from 0 to 1 or vice versa. Signal Button. Creates a button that s can click to generate the signal status form 0 to 1 or vice versa. Checkbox (FC data) Creates a check box so that s can select or deselect an option. Combobox (FC data) Creates a combobox so that s can select from a list of options in an interactive display. Insert ActiveX Document. Inserts a link to an ActiveX document, such as Word document, into the display. See 3.22 Inserting an ActiveX Document. Insert Picture from File. Inserts a picture (graphic). See 3.20 Inserting a Graphic.
8 - 6 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description Insert Shape from File. Inserts or links a shape sequence or a dynamic shape. See 2.4.3 Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display and 2.5.4 Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display. Insert ActiveX Control. Inserts a link to an ActiveX Control. See 3.23 Inserting an ActiveX Control.
1.4.4
Toolbox Toolbar Note! You use the Toolbox toolbar only when the system to be defined contains EPKS integration. The Toolbox toolbar contains both PMD object creation buttons and EPKS object creation buttons. Next are described only the EPKS object creation buttons (marked with red color in the figure below). See 1.4.3 PMD toolbox Toolbar for explanations of the other Toolbox toolbar buttons.
Button
Description Alphanumeric (FC data). Used to display values in many different formats. Indicator (FC data). Creates a “gauge” that indicates relative values. Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square. Rounded Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square with rounded corners. Oval. Creates an oval or circle. Line. Creates a straight line. Polyline. Creates a multi-segment line (which are similar to polygons, but with one open side). To create a polyline, click to mark each node, except for the last. You mark the last node by double-clicking. Polygon. Creates a polygon. To create a polygon, you click to mark each node, except for the last. You mark the last node by double-clicking, which then closes the polygon. Bezier Curve. Creates a smooth-curved line. See 3.3.1 Creating a Bezier Curve. Arc. Creates an arc (a quarter of an oval or circle). Wedge. Creates a segment (quarter) of an oval or a circle. Textbox. Creates a box where you can write the text. Hyperlink. Creates a hyperlink. When a clicks the hyperlink in the interface, Station calls up the specified URL (such as a Web page) or display. Alphanumeric. Used to display values in many different formats.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 7
Button
Description Checkbox. Creates a check box so that s can select or deselect an option in an interactive display. Pushbutton. Creates a button that s can click to perform a specified function. Indicator. Creates a “gauge” that indicates relative values. Combobox. Creates a combobox so that s can select from a list of options in an interactive display. Trend. Creates a trend (graph) that shows changes in values over time. See 5.19 About trends. Alarm table. Inserts an alarm icon (as used in the Alarm Summary) which indicates an alarm state. See 5.18 About alarm and event tables. Event Table. Creates a specialized table that lists events. See 5.18 About alarm and event tables. Alarm State. Inserts an alarm icon (as used in the Alarm Summary), which indicates an alarm state. Table. Inserts a table into a display. More information: see Knowledge Builder/ HMIWeb Display Building Guide/Object properties.
1.4.5
Arrange Toolbar The Arrange toolbar contains buttons for aligning and grouping objects.
Button
Description These buttons change order in which objects are stacked on top of each other. See 3.15 Changing the Stacking Order.
These buttons group/ungroup objects. See 3.11 Grouping Objects.
These buttons align objects. See 3.9 Aligning Objects.
These buttons change the size of objects so that they are the same size as a reference object. See 3.6 Resizing Objects.
8 - 8 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description These buttons move objects so that they are evenly spaced. See 3.10 Distributing Objects.
Locks/unlocks an object. Locking an object protects it from being accidentally moved or resized. See 3.8 Locking Objects.
1.4.6
View Toolbar The View toolbar includes a range of editing buttons.
Button
Description Zoom. Sets the “magnification” for the display. Use the Zoomerdisplay.
- to zoom in on a particular part of the
Rulers. Shows/hides the rulers. The rulers make it easier to arrange objects in a neat and consistent manner. Grid. Shows/hides the grid. The grid makes it easier to arrange objects in a neat and consistent manner. To set the grid spacing and color, see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options). Snap-to-Grid. Turns the “snap-to-grid” function on/off. When snap-to-grid is on, objects automatically align to the grid when you create, move or resize them. Properties window. Opens/closes the Properties window, which you use to edit the characteristics of the selected object(s). See 1.7 Properties Window. Script Editor. Opens/closes the Script Editor, which you use to write scripts. (A script is a mini-program that performs a specific task.) Please refer to Knowledge Builder, HMIWeb Display Building Guide for more information. Object Explorer. Shows/hides the Object Explorer, which lists every object in the display. See 1.5 Object Explorer. Point Browser. Shows/hides the Point Browser, which lists points on a selected Experion server. See 1.6 Point Browser. Shape Gallery. Shows/hides the Shape Gallery, which makes it easy to preview and add shapes to your displays. See 1.8 PMD Display Object Library and 1.9 Shape Gallery. HTML Source. Opens the HTML source for the display in a text editor. If you are familiar with HTML, you can change the display by editing the HTML source. Style Sheet. If a style sheet is attached to the display, opens it in a text editor. More information: see Knowledge Builder/ HMIWeb Display Building Guide/ Using advanced display features.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 9
1.4.7
Transform Toolbar The Transform toolbar contains buttons for transforming objects.
Button
Description Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical. These buttons perform mirrorimage transformations on objects. See 3.12 Flipping Objects.
Rotate Left, Rotate Right. These buttons rotate objects +/-90 degrees. See 3.13 Rotating Objects. Union, Difference, Intersection, Exclusive OR, . These buttons create a new object from two or more overlapping objects. See 3.14 Combining objects.
Convert to Path. Converts objects, such as rectangles and circles, to paths (lines and curves). Having converted an object to a path, you can edit its nodes - See 3.16.Using the Node Editor. Combine, Un-Combine. These buttons combine/uncombine static objects, such as lines and rectangles, which helps improve display performance. See 3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance.
1.4.8
Format Toolbar The Format toolbar contains buttons for controlling the appearance of text. You can use Format buttons in two ways:
8 - 10 • Getting Started
•
If you click a button while one or more objects are selected, it only affects the appearance of selected object(s).
•
If you click a button while no object is selected, you change the display’s default value (standard value), which is then used whenever you create new objects in that display. See 3.2 Setting Drawing Defaults.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description Font. Sets the font of text. Note that you should only use fonts that are loaded on every Station computer. Font Size. Sets the size of text. (If you want to specify a nonstandard size, click the box and type the size—for example: 56.5pt—and then press ENTER.) Bold, Italic and Underline. Set the text’s appearance.
Align Left, Align Right, Center and Justify. Sets the text alignment within a paragraph.
1.4.9
Drawing Toolbar The Drawing toolbar contains buttons for controlling colors and line characteristics. You can use Format buttons in two ways: •
If you click a button while one or more objects are selected, it only affects the appearance of selected object(s).
•
If you click a button while no object is selected, you change the display’s default value (standard value), which is then used whenever you create new objects in that display. See 3.2 Setting Drawing Defaults.
Button
Description Line Color. Sets the line color of objects. Click the button to apply the default color, or click the arrow to the right of the button to select another color — see 3.18 Defining an object’s color. Fill Color. Sets the fill color of objects. Click the button to apply the default color, or click the arrow to the right of the button to select another color — see 3.18 Defining an object’s color. Text Color. Sets the fill color of text. Click the button to apply the default color, or click the arrow to the right of the button to select another color — see 3.18 Defining an object’s color. Line Width. Sets the line thickness. Line Style. Sets the line style, such as solid, dotted and dashed. Start Arrow and End Arrow. Sets the line arrow style.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 11
1.4.10 Scripting Toolbar The Scripting toolbar is used in conjunction with the Script Editor. (Opened/closed with on the View Toolbar.) The Script Editor is used to format scripts. (For details about the Script Editor and writing scripts, see HMIWeb Display Builder’s help.)
Button
Description Indent, Outdent. Indents/outdents the selected line.
1.5
Object Explorer The Object Explorer appears on the left of the Display Builder window. The Object Explorer shows every object in the current display and, in the case of group objects, shows the object hierarchy. If the Object Explorer is not visible, click
on the View toolbar.
The following table describes the tasks you can perform in the Object Explorer. To:
Do this:
Select one object
Click it.
Select several objects
Hold down CTRL and click each object.
Select a range of objects from the list
Hold down SHIFT and click the first and last objects you want to select.
Edit the properties of one or more objects
Select the object(s) as described above and edit the properties in the Properties window(s).
Sort objects to the order in which they are created or stacked on top of each other.
Sort objects in alphabetical order
8 - 12 • Getting Started
at the bottom of the Object Click Explorer. By default, the stacking order is the same as the order in which you created the objects — that is, the first object you created is at the bottom of the stack and the last object is at on the top. You can manually change the stacking order — see 3.15 Changing the Stacking Order. at the bottom of the Object Click Explorer.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To: Show/hide objects within a group
Copy an object to the same or another display
1.6
Do this: icon to the left of the Double-click the object group name. Alternatively click the + / - to the left of the icon. Drag the object from the Object Explorer and drop it on the display.
Point Browser The Point Browser displays every point that has been defined on the server to which you are connected. Note! You can use Point Browser only with EPKS objects.
Using the Point Browser The following table describes the tasks you can perform using the Point Browser. To:
Do this:
Select a point
Click it.
Filter the list of points
Click Show Filter. The enterprise model appears. Expand the model by which you want to filter and click the appropriate entity in the model. The point list changes to show only those points that belong to the entity.
Remove the filter
Click Clear Filter.
Connect to a different server
Click the Change button. Select the server from the list of servers and click OK.
Include a point in display
Click on the point name in the Point Browser and then drag and drop the point on the display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 13
1.7
To:
Do this:
Apply a point to a display element
Choose one of the following: - Drag the point name from the point browser onto the "point" field of the data property page of the display element. - Select the display element then select the point in the point browser and click Apply.
Properties Window You use the Properties window to view and edit the properties of the selected object(s). The properties include physical characteristics, such as color and size, as well as database link details. You also use the Properties window to view and edit the display’s properties — these appear when no objects are selected. If the Properties window is not visible, click
on the View toolbar.
The Properties window may change whenever you select another object. In the following picture, the left-hand example shows the PMD Data Tab of the Properties window for a Device Control (4/3) object, whereas the right-hand example shows the PMD Data Tab when you select a Valve object.
The Properties window is modeless, which means that the selected object(s) change as soon as you change a property’s value. (Unlike a standard dialog box, you do not have to click an OK button.) Properties are grouped according to the tabs that run across the top of the Properties window. The following picture shows how the window changes as you click the tabs.
8 - 14 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The Properties window also changes if you: •
Select several objects of the same type. Any properties whose values are not identical are blanked or grayed out. For example, Name in the General tab will be blank because each object has a unique name. If you edit a property, you change all selected objects — for example, if you change Fill Color to red, they will all turn red. Note! If you select several PMD objects, you can change only their general (EPKS) properties. PMD specific tabs are grayed out.
•
Select objects of various types, such as a pushbutton and an alphanumeric. In this case, the window only displays tabs that are shared by all selected objects. For example, if you selected an alphanumeric and a pushbutton, you could change the properties on the Font tab because both objects contain text.
•
Deselect all objects. The Properties window then shows the display’s properties, and its title changes to “Display Properties”.
For a description of each property, see 4 PMD Object Properties 6 Display Properties 5 EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 15
1.8
PMD Display Object Library PMD Display Object Library includes pre-built shapes that make editing custom displays faster and easier. You can, for example, add machine parts to the display and represent the tag states better than with the basic display objects. The shapes can be used in the displays of the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. You can preview the shapes with help of the Shape Gallery. The Shape Gallery makes it easy to preview and insert shapes into your displays. See also 1.9 Shape Gallery. If the Shape Gallery is not visible, click
on the View toolbar.
The PMD Display Object Library is located in the directory C:\Program Files\Honeywell\PMDC\HMIWeb PMD\HMIWeb Display Builder\PMD Display Object Library. You can select the shape library directory by pressing the window.
at the top of
To configure the Shape Gallery, see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options). To preview shapes: •
Select the appropriate folder in the left-hand pane. A oneline summary of each file appears in the right-hand pane.
•
If you want to preview each shape, click the
button.
To insert a shapes into a display, either: •
Drag it from the list and drop it into the display.
Right-click it and select Insert Into Display from the shortcut menu. Select the option Contents of shape file and click OK in the window opened.
8 - 16 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
1.8.1
Naming of the shapes The names of the shapes included in the PMD Display Object Library (e.g. PMD_Pump_h_mai_01.sha) contain the following fields:
_
_
_
_
, where
= PMD
= Short description of the shape’s function, e.g. Pump
h = horizontal v = vertical r = right l =: left u = up d = down
p = PV s =: SP o = OP d = Dev |PV-SP| m = mode a = alarming, including alarm acknowledge i = information presentation, engineering units
= This number is used if a specific shape has several variations. Example: PMD_XXX_h_psomai_01.sha, where: Type = PMD, Function = XXX, Orientation = h, Functionality = psomai, Index number = 01 horizontal
Experion PKS with PMD Controller
alarm
information
PMD_XXX_h_psomai_01 index number
shape’s function
PV SP
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
OP
Mode
Getting Started • 8 - 17
1.8.2
Dynamic Shapes The following table shows the dynamic shapes included in the PMD Display Object Library.
Buttons:
PMD_BinButton_h_i_01.sha
Devices: PMD_Device2_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Device3_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Device2_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Device3_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Device2_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_Device3_v_mai_01.sha
Fans:
PMD_Fan_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fan_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fan_v_mai_01.sha PMD_Fan_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Fan_v_mai_02.sha PMD_Fan_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_Fan_v_pai_01.sha PMD_Fan_h_pai_01.sha
8 - 18 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Fan_v_pmai_01.sha PMD_Fan_h_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_l_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_r_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_r_mai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_u_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_u_mai_01.sha
Motors:
PMD_Motor1W_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_l_ai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_Motor2S_l_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_03.sha PMD_Motor2S_l_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_r_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_04.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 19
PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_r_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_02.sha
PMD_Motor2S_r_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_03.sha PMD_Motor2S_r_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_l_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_04.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_01.sha PMD_Motor2W_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_l_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_02.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_03.sha PMD_Motor2W_l_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_r_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_04.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_05.sha
8 - 20 • Getting Started
PMD_Motor2W_r_mai_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Motor2W_r_pai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_06.sha
PMD_Motor1Wbase_h_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor2W_r_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1Wbase_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_MotorX_h_ai_01.sha
Pumps:
PMD_Pump_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_mai_01.sha PMD_Pump_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_mai_02.sha PMD_Pump_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_Pump_v_pai_01.sha PMD_Pump_h_pai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_h_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_l_ai_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Pumpbase_r_ai_01.sha
Getting Started • 8 - 21
PMD_Pumpbase_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_r_mai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_u_ai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_u_mai_01.sha
Valves:
PMD_CntrlValve_h_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValve_v_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValve_v_oi_02.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_h_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_h_oi_02.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_v_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_v_oi_02.sha
PMD_MotorValve_h_ai_01.sha PMD_MotorValve_h_oai_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_ai_02.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_oai_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_oai_02.sha
PMD_OnOffValve_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_OnOffValve_h_mai_01.sha 8 - 22 • Getting Started
PMD_Valve_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_h_mai_02.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_OnOffValve_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_OnOffValve_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_v_mai_02.sha
PMD_ValveFill_h_i_01.sha PMD_ValvePlate_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_h_ai_01.sha PMD_ValvePlate_v_mai_02.sha
1.8.3
PMD_ValvePlate_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlateFill_v_i_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_ValveHand_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_ValveHand_v_ai_01.sha
Static shapes The following table shows the static shapes included in the PMD Display Object Library. PMD_Canal_01.sha PMD_Canal_02.sha
PMD_Cleaner_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 23
PMD_Cleaner_02.sha
PMD_Cleaner_03.sha
PMD_CntrlValve_v_01.sha PMD_CntrlValve_h_01.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_01.sha PMD_Condenser_01.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_02.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_03.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_04.sha
PMD_DataAcq_01.sha
PMD_Deculator_01.sha
PMD_Device2_01.sha
PMD_DataEntry_01.sha
PMD_Deculator_02.sha
PMD_Device3_01.sha
PMD_Fan_01.sha
PMD_FC_01.sha
PMD_Filter_02.sha PMD_Filter_01.sha
8 - 24 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Filter_03.sha
PMD_Filter_04.sha
PMD_FwTank_01.sha
PMD_Headbox_02.sha PMD_Headbox_01.sha
PMD_Headbox_03.sha
PMD_Headbox_04.sha
PMD_Lorry_01.sha
PMD_Headbox_05.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 25
PMD_Mode_01.sha PMD_Mixer_v_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_01.sha PMD_MotorValve_h_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_01.sha PMD_Motor2S_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_01.sha
PMD_Pipe_h_01.sha
PMD_Pipe_v_01.sha
PMD_Pipearrow_h_01.sha
PMD_Pipearrow_v_01.sha
PMD_Pulper_01.sha
PMD_Pulper_2.sha
PMD_Pump_01.sha
PMD_Pulper_03.sha 8 - 26 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Refiner_h_01.sha
PMD_Refiner_h_03.sha
PMD_Refiner_h_02.sha
PMD_Screen_h_01.sha
PMD_Screen_v_01.sha
PMD_Screen_v_02.sha
PMD_Silo_v_02.sha
PMD_Silo_v_01.sha
PMD_Silo_v_03.sha
PMD_SkipBack_01.sha
PMD_Strainer_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_SkipNext_01.sha
PMD_Strainer_02.sha
Getting Started • 8 - 27
PMD_Tank_h_01.sha PMD_Strainer_03.sha
PMD_Tank_v_01.sha
PMD_Tank_v_03.sha
PMD_Tank_v_02.sha PMD_Tank_v_04.sha
PMD_Tank_v_05.sha
PMD_Tank_v_06.sha
PMD_Valve3W_01.sha
PMD_Tower_01.sha
PMD_Valve_h_01.sha
8 - 28 • Getting Started
PMD_ValveHand_h_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_ValveOnOff_h_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_h_01.sha
PMD_Valve_Plate_v_01.sha
PMD_Vat_v_01.sha PMD_WirePit_01.sha
PMD_WirePit_02.sha
1.9
PMD_WirePit_03.sha
Shape Gallery The Shape Gallery makes it easy to preview and insert shape sequences and dynamic shapes into your displays. See 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence and 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape. HMIWeb Display Builder is supplied with pre-built shapes that you can include in your displays. These shapes are stored in C:\Honeywell\Client\HMIWeb Display Builder\ShapeLib, in subjectbased folders. (See also 1.8 PMD Display Object Library for more information about pre-built shapes for Experion PKS with PMD Controller system.) If the Shape Gallery is not visible, click
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
on the View toolbar.
Getting Started • 8 - 29
Note! You cannot insert a linked shape unless you have ed the folder that contains the shape. To configure the Shape Gallery, see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
To preview shape sequences/dynamic shapes: 1.
Select the appropriate folder in the left-hand pane. A oneline summary of each file appears in the right-hand pane.
2.
If you want to preview each shape, click the
3.
If you want to preview individual shapes within a shape sequence (where number of shapes is 2 or more), double-
button.
click it. (Alternatively, select the shape and click the button). To insert a shape sequences/dynamic shapes into a display, either:
8 - 30 • Getting Started
•
Drag it from the list and drop it into the display.
•
Right-click it and select Insert Into Display from the shortcut menu.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2
Creating Displays
2.1
Display Types To select a display type click the arrow to the right of New display button in the Standard toolbar. The display types are: Display type:
Description
Display
A Display is a standard display into which the other display types and objects are associated with to form a project specific custom display. See 2.2 Creating a standard display.
Popup
A Popup is a secondary window that appears when someone clicks the associated object in a display. See 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate.
Shape Sequence
A Shape sequence is, in effect, a "custom" object that is used in displays as a status indicator or an animation. See 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence.
Dynamic Shape
A Dynamic shape is, in effect, a "custom" object that is used in displays to present complex dynamic data. See 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
Note:
2.2
•
You cannot change the display’s type after creating it. For example, you cannot change a display into a shape sequence.
•
An asterisk (*) appears in the title bar, next to the display's filename when you have changed the display, but not saved those changes.
•
If you need to keep track of changes to displays, you should save them in archive format and use a version management tool such as Microsoft Visual Source Safe. (To learn about archive format, see 2.11 About archive format.)
•
The default folder for custom displays is Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract. See 2.2.2 Saving a display.
Creating a standard display Display is a standard display into which the other display types and objects are associated with to form a project specific custom display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 31
To create a new display:
Click the arrow to the right of New display button and select the type Display. A blank display appears. For details about a display’s properties, such as its title, size and background image, see 6 Display Properties. For details about how to add objects into a display and modify them, see 3 Drawing Techniques. For details about how to create and add popups, faceplates, shape sequences and dynamic objects into a display; see 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate, 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence and 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape. For details about validating PMD display data, see 2.12 PMD Display Data Validation.
2.2.1
Creating a display from a Web Page You can create a display that is based on a Web page. For example, you may want to use a modified version of your intranet's home page as Station's default display. Note! If you use the zoom function in HMIWeb Display Builder or Station, scrollbars are not correctly resized. To create a display from a Web page: 1. Select File / Open and select the Web page you want to use. The Web page opens. 2. Select File / Save As and give it a suitable name. It is now a display — which means you can configure its properties and add HMIWeb objects such as buttons and indicators.
2.2.2
Saving a display The display file name is defined using the HMIWeb Display Builder command: File / Save as. Because on a interface (Station), displays are retrieved by using file names, the displays’ names must be defined so that they are as short and descriptive as possible. Numbers may be also be used, provided that the first character in a name is invariably a letter, for example D1, D2, D3... In the planning stage the displays can be saved to the Design module PC to the directory: C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract Use the .htm file extension.
8 - 32 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
When a display is saved for the first time, the HMIWeb Display Builder creates a file name related directory with the _files extension (for example, Menu_files) that will follow the .htm file automatically. Among other things, the _files directory contains the block.pin connection data that have been defined for the display. The _files display directory inhibits the renaming of the display using the Explorer program. If necessary, rename the display with the HMIWeb Display Builder using the Save as command. At the latest in the system’s start-up stage all the displays must be saved to the PMD Server as follows: In case of a non-redundant PMD server save the displays to the server's directory C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract In case of a redundant PMD server 1. Use design module (DM) to create connection to the floating network address (floating IP) of the redundant PMD Controller: - Open the My Computer window - Select Tools / Map Network Drive - Select F in the Drive field - Write in the Folder field \\
\Experion_PKS\Client\Abstract. - Press Finish. 2. Save displays in the HMIWeb Display Builder program: - Select File Save - In the Save as window browse the folder Abstract on
\Experion _PKS\Client. - In the File name field write the display name and press Save.
2.3
Creating a popup or faceplate A popup is a secondary window that appears when someone clicks the associated object in a display. A faceplate is a specialized type of popup that shows critical information about the point to which the object is linked.
Creating a popup: Click the arrow to the right of New display the type Popup. A blank popup appears.
button and select
For details about a popup’s properties, such as its title, size and background image, see 6 Display Properties. For details about how to add objects into a popup and modify them, see 3 Drawing Techniques. Because operators may not know that a popup/faceplate is attached to an object (other than moving the mouse pointer over the object), you should consider using a visual cue. For example, if a popup/faceplate is attached to an alphanumeric, you could set its Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 33
border color to red (and set the border color of the other alphanumerics to black).
Creating a faceplate: Experion PKS with PMD Controller system contains ready-made faceplates for the following tag blocks: •
measurement
•
control
•
motor
•
valve
•
control switch
•
sequence
•
device control
•
general logic
•
binary.
A faceplate is generated automatically for a tag block once the desired faceplate has been selected and its initial values defined using the PMD Builder’s block definition functions, and the application loaded into the system. The HMIWeb Display Builder is used to attach the faceplate output to a desired object.
Attaching a popup or faceplate to an object: To attach a popup or faceplate to an object: 1. Select the object. 2. Click the Behaviors tab of the Properties window and select either Popup or Faceplate, as appropriate. 3. If you selected Popup, click the Popup tab and specify the popup's filename and initial position. If you selected Faceplate, use the PMD Data tab to define the block of which faceplate you call up. (More information: see 4 PMD Object Properties.) Note! In order to preview a popup in a display, you must the folder in which you store the popup. That is done in the Shapes tab of the Options dialog box. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
2.4
Creating a Shape Sequence A shape sequence is, in effect, a "custom object" that is used in displays as either a:
8 - 34 • Creating Displays
•
Status Indicator
•
Animation
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Notes: 1.
The following rules and restrictions apply to shape sequences: •
Each shape must be a single object or group.
•
Shapes must be arranged (left-to-right/top-tobottom) in the appropriate order. That is, the first shape is the top-left one, and so on.
•
If the shape sequence is to be used as a status indicator, you can use the first shape to represent a "bad value". This shape is only displayed when the value cannot be determined—because, for example, the server cannot access the associated field device. When creating a shape sequence file, you must select Use first shape for bad value on the General tab.
•
If the shape sequence is to be used as a status indicator for a status point, the number of shapes must be greater than or equal to the number of parameter states. (Plus an extra shape if you want a "bad value" shape.) If the shape sequence has more shapes than the parameter has states, the remaining shapes are never used. For example, if a parameter has four states and the shape sequence has nine shapes (including a "bad value" shape), only shapes 2 to 5 shapes are used.
•
A shape can include dynamic objects. However, for performance reasons, you should minimize the use of such objects and thoroughly check the shape sequence's performance before issuing it.
2.
If you intend to add custom properties to the shape, you should give them names that reflect their purpose. For example, if a custom property represents pressure, you could name it "Pressure". (For an introduction to custom properties, see 2.5.1 Custom Properties.)
3.
You should store the shape sequence in a ed folder. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
4.
To learn how to insert a shape sequence into a display, see 2.4.3 Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display.
To create a shape sequence: •
Click the arrow to the right of New display and choose Shape Sequence. A blank shape sequence appears.
•
Configure the shape sequence's properties as appropriate— see 6 Display Properties.
•
Add shapes (objects) as required—see 3.3 Creating Objects.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
button
Creating Displays • 8 - 35
2.4.1
Using a Shape Sequence as a Status Indicator The following figures form a simple shape sequence that is suitable for use as a status indicator for a two-state status point. (In this example, the first shape represents a "bad value" and is only displayed if the server cannot determine the point's value.)
The following table shows the result when this shape sequence is used in a display to reflect the state of a status point. Parameter state:
The result in the display:
0
1
Unknown (”bad value”)
The number of shapes must be greater than or equal to the number of parameter states. (Plus an extra shape if you want a "bad value" shape.) If the shape sequence has more shapes than the parameter has states, the remaining shapes are never used. For example, if a parameter has four states and the shape sequence has nine shapes (including a "bad value" shape), only shapes 2 to 5 shapes are used.
Using a shape sequence with an analog point When a shape sequence is used with an analog point, the shapes are automatically allocated across the point's range (excluding the first shape if it represents a "bad value"). For example, if the value ranges from 0 to 1000, and there are 11 shapes (the first representing a "bad value"), then:
8 - 36 • Creating Displays
•
Shape 2 is displayed if the value is between 0 and 100.
•
Shape 3 is displayed if the value is between 101 and 200.
•
.
•
.
•
Shape 11 is displayed if the value is between 901 and 1000.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2.4.2
Using a Shape Sequence as an Animation The following picture shows a shape sequence that is suitable for use as an animation (when used in conjunction with a script). Each shape, except the first, represents a separate “frame” in the animation — when displayed rapidly in succession they give the impression of a rotating fan. The first shape would be used to represent a stopped fan.
2.4.3
Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display Notes: •
When you insert a shape sequence, you can either: ƒ
Embed it. This is the recommended option because it optimizes display performance. (This pastes a copy of the shape into the display.) You can make this the default option by choosing Tools > Options, clicking the Shapes tab and selecting the Contents of shape file option.
ƒ
Link to it. (The shape remains in a separate file.)
•
You cannot insert a linked shape sequence unless you have ed the folder that contains it. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
•
You can also insert a shape sequence by dragging the shape sequence from the Shape Gallery
To insert a shape sequence: 1. Click
on the PMD Toolbox toolbar.
2. Move the pointer to the display and drag it diagonally to mark the rectangle where you want to insert the shape. (The top-left of this rectangle marks the top-left of the inserted shape.) When you release the mouse button, the Insert Shape dialog box appears. 3. Select the shape sequence you want to insert, select the appropriate Insert into display option and then click Open. The shape appears in the display. 4. If necessary, move and resize the shape. 5. Open the Properties Window, click the Behaviors tab and select Shape Sequence Animation. The Data and Animation tabs are added to the Properties Window. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 37
6. Click the Data tab and enter the database link details. For example, if you are linking to a particular point parameter, select Point/Parameter from Type of database link, and then enter the appropriate point and parameter details. 7. Click the Animation tab and enter the number of shapes you want to use in Number of shapes. (For example, if the parameter has only four states but the shape sequence contains eight shapes, type 4 to use the first four shapes.)
2.5
Creating a Dynamic Shape A dynamic shape is, in effect, a "custom object" that is used in displays to present complex dynamic data.
2.5.1
Custom Properties Custom Properties are used to map dynamic objects of a dynamic shape to the process data. You define a set of custom properties for the dynamic shape so that when you insert the shape into a display, you can map its dynamic objects to the correct process data. Most dynamic objects, such as the indicator, only require two custom properties. However, for complex objects you may need to define several custom properties.
2.5.2
Dynamic Objects As the name implies, a dynamic object changes appearance as the value of the data item it represents - typically a department.block.pin (point parameter) - changes.
2.5.3
Creating a Dynamic Shape All objects within a dynamic shape must be grouped to form one object. To create a dynamic shape: 1. Click the arrow to the right of New display button and select Dynamic Shape. A blank dynamic shape appears. 2. Double-click the blank dynamic shape to open the Properties Window.
8 - 38 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Configure the General tab properties. 3. Add objects to the dynamic shape and configure them in the normal manner apart from the custom properties for the dynamic objects, see steps 4 and 5. 4. Define the custom properties for the dynamic objects.
a. Open the dynamic shape Properties Window and click the Custom Properties tab. b. Click the Add button to add a blank line to the list. c. Type the custom property's name in Name. (Normally you need the name at least for the department and block.) d. Type the custom property's type in Type. e. Give a suitable description for the custom property. f.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Repeat steps b) to e) for the remaining custom properties.
Creating Displays • 8 - 39
5. Assign the custom properties to the dynamic objects. Select a dynamic object and open the Properties Window for it.
a. Click the PMD Data tab. b. Define the correct pin name for each property in the Property list c. Repeat for the remaining dynamic objects. 6. Group all objects into one group before saving the dynamic shape. (See 3.11 Grouping Objects for more information).
2.5.4
Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display When you insert a dynamic shape into a display, you can •
embed (paste) it. This option is recommended.
•
link to it. In this case, the dynamic shape is inserted into a display by creating a link between the display and the dynamic shape. The shape remains in a separate file.
Note! If the linked dynamic shapes are not stored in the same folder as the displays that use them, you must the shape folder(s) in the Shapes tab of the Options window. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
8 - 40 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To insert a dynamic shape: on the PMD Toolbox Toolbar.
1.
Click
2.
Move the pointer to the display and drag it diagonally to mark the rectangle where you want to insert the shape. (The top-left of this rectangle marks the top-left of the inserted shape.) When you release the mouse button, the Insert Shape dialog box appears.
3.
Select the dynamic shape you want to insert.
4.
Select the appropriate Insert into display option a) Select Contents of shape file to embed the shape (recommended). b) Select Link to shape file to make a link to the shape in which case, the shape remains in a separate file.
5.
Click Open. The shape appears.
6.
If necessary, move and resize the shape.
7.
Open the shape's Properties Window.
Click the Custom Properties Tab and, for each custom property, specify the appropriate data in Value. 8.
2.5.5
Define the other required properties for the shape.
Example of a dynamic shape The following picture shows a typical dynamic shape that contains:
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
•
One dynamic object - An indicator (the vertical “bar” on the left of the tank), which represents the tank’s current level.
•
Several static objects - such as the tank and the pipes.
Creating Displays • 8 - 41
The following picture shows how the custom properties for the dynamic object (indicator) are defined.
The Properties Window of the dynamic shape.
The following picture shows how the custom properties are assigned to the dynamic object (indicator).
The Properties Window of the indicator object.
8 - 42 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The following picture shows a display in which three copies of this dynamic shape are used to represent three separate tanks. Each copy is configured so that its dynamic object (indicator) shows the correct data for the tank.
The following picture shows how the correct data is connected to the first copy of the dynamic shape.
The Properties Window of the dynamic shape in a display.
2.6
Creating a Point Detail (Template) Display Note! This function is not ed in the PMD system. A point detail display (also called template display) is used to display information about a point of a particular type. Because each type of point has a different data structure, a separate point detail display is required for each point type. Consequently, when you create a new type of container, flexible or CDA point, you must create a matching point detail display. You then add an appropriate dynamic object — such as an alphanumeric or indicator — for each parameter you want s to see. The following procedure summarizes the special steps involved in creating a point detail display. (Other tasks, such as inserting graphics and grouping objects are performed in the normal manner.) To create a point detail display: 1.
Open a new display.
2.
Select View / Properties window to open the Properties window.
3.
Set Type to Point Detail.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 43
4.
Give the display an appropriate Title (in the General tab of the Properties window). For example, make it the same as the name of the point type.
5.
Add an appropriate dynamic object for each parameter you want s to see.
6.
Configure the Data tab properties of the Properties window for each dynamic object, specifying the address details using the appropriate format: •
Container Point Format
•
Flexible Point Format
•
DA Point Format
Container Point Format Property
Description
Type of database link
Select Point/Parameter.
Point
Leave blank.
Parameter
The syntax is: Alias. Parameter Where: •
Alias is the name you defined in Quick Builder for the “contained” (child) point
•
Parameter is parameter name.
For example, if you wanted to display the PV of a contained point whose alias is “HoursRun”, you would type: HoursRun.PV Data entry allowed
Allows s to change the parameter’s value. If you select Data entry allowed, Security Level appears, from which you select the appropriate level. (Only s with the specified level, or higher, can enter data.)
Flexible Point Format Property
Description
Type of database link
Select Point/Parameter.
Point
Leave blank.
Parameter
The parameter name.
Data entry allowed
Allows s to change the parameter’s value. If you select Data entry allowed, Security Level appears, from which you select the appropriate level. (Only s with the specified level, or higher, can enter data.)
CDA Point Format
8 - 44 • Creating Displays
Property
Description
Type of database link
Select Point/Parameter.
Point
The name of the control module.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Parameter
The syntax is: FunctionBlock. Tag Where:
Data entry allowed
2.7
•
FunctionBlock is the name of the function block within the control module
•
Tag is the name of the tag within the function block
Allows s to change the parameter’s value. If you select Data entry allowed, Security Level appears, from which you select the appropriate level. (Only s with the specified level, or higher, can enter data.)
Embedding a linked shape If a shape is linked to a display, you can embed it. (Embedding pastes a copy of the shape into the display.) Note! Embedding is recommended because it optimizes display performance. Unlike a linked shape, an embedded shape is not automatically upgraded if you subsequently change the shape. If you want to upgrade an embedded shape, see 2.8 Upgrading an Embedded Shape. To embed one or more linked shapes:
2.8
1.
Select the linked shape(s). If you want to select a lot of shapes, it is easier to select them using the Object Explorer.
2.
Choose Tools > Embed Shapes.
3.
Click OK.
Upgrading an Embedded Shape If you embed a shape into a display and you subsequently change the shape, you may want to update the embedded copy in the display. Note! The following procedure only works if the shape is in a ed folder. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options). To update one or more embedded shapes: 1. Select the embedded shape(s). 2. Select Tools / Upgrade Embedded Shapes to open the Upgrade Embedded Shapes dialog box. 3. Click Upgrade.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 45
2.9
Guidelines for Optimizing Display Performance These guidelines describe how to achieve the best performance for your displays.
2.9.1
Display-creation Guidelines Minimize the Object Count The processing required to call up a display depends primarily on the object count, almost regardless of the complexity of individual objects. You can reduce the object count, without affecting the display's appearance, by: •
Using the Polyline tool to draw complex lines, rather than using the Line tool to draw a series of straight lines.
•
Using the Combine tool to convert several objects into a single object. Avoid using excessive nesting with the Group tool because this creates additional group objects.
•
Using a third-party package to create separate graphics for complex static components, such as backgrounds, and then inserting them into the display. Such graphics are treated as single objects, regardless of their internal complexity.
Suitable formats for inserted graphics are: •
WMF (Windows MetaFile) and EMF (Enhanced MetaFile). These are vector formats that result in small files that scale well.
•
PNG. This is best for bitmap graphics with transparent backgrounds.
•
JPEG. This is best for photographic-type images.
Note that the above techniques are only necessary if the display is particularly complex, or if it contains numerous shapes. If you are preparing a shape library for general usage, you should pay particular attention to the above techniques, so that the performance of displays that make extensive use of your shapes is not compromised.
Minimize the number of Active Objects You can improve a display's performance by minimizing the number of active objects, such as alphanumerics and indicators or animations. This also has usability advantages because, from an operator's point of view, simple and uncluttered displays are generally easier to use.
8 - 46 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
When a display is called up or refreshed, each active object retrieves multiple process parameters from the server — even a simple object such as an alphanumeric, requires about five parameters, such as Value, Alarm State and Scan Status. Consequently, a display with a large number of active objects may have performance problems because of the number of parameters that must be retrieved.
Use the Supplied Shapes You should use the shapes supplied with HMIWeb Display Builder wherever possible because they have been optimized for display performance. See 1.8 PMD Display Object Library. Apart from improving display performance, the supplied shapes make it easier to create visually consistent displays.
Deselect Unused Object Behaviors Deselect any object behaviors that are not required — some behaviors, such as color breakpoints, involve additional processing even if they are not used.
Minimize the Use of ActiveX Controls ActiveX controls take slightly longer to render than native HMIWeb objects. You should therefore avoid using large numbers of ActiveX controls.
Embed Shapes Where possible, embed shapes into displays by deselecting the Link to shape file option.
Minimize the Number of Scripts The performance of a single, long script is better than several short scripts. For example, try writing a single, long script on one object event rather than several short scripts on several object events. Instead of writing a script to create a custom behavior for an object, consider using standard behaviors.
Use only Allowed Data Connections Data connections can be made only to the same department, in which the display is saved. (In Experion PKS with PMD Controller system, references between departments can be used only between PMD Controllers.)
2.10 About display templates Display templates make it easier to create new displays and to keep them visually consistent. (A template is a display that is stored in the HMIWeb Display Builder's Templates folder.) For example, if you need to create a set of displays that require the same background image and the same set of buttons, you would create a display that contains the image and the buttons, and then Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 47
save it in the Templates folder. Then, when you want to create one of these displays, you simply select the template. Note: •
Displays are not linked to the templates. For example, displays do not change if you subsequently change the contents or layout of a template on which they were based.
•
You use a template to create other templates. For example, if you wanted to use the same background image on all your displays, you could create a "base" template that contained the image. Then each time you wanted to create a new template, you would select the base template.
Supplied templates Experion is supplied with the following templates. Template
Description
Point Detail
A point detail display is used to display point information for all points of a particular type. You need to create point detail displays if you have any specialized point types. For details, see 2.6 Creating a Point Detail (Template) Display. (Experion is supplied with point detail displays for common point types.)
2.11 About archive format If you need to keep track of changes to displays—for example, you use a version management tool such as Microsoft Visual Source Safe—you should save them in archive format. When you save a display/shape in archive format, it is saved as a single file, which is suitable for use with version management tools. (If you save a display in standard format, an associated folder is also created that contains various files and graphics. The folder has the same name as the display, but with a "_files" extension.) Archived files have a "hda" (display) or "hsa" (shape) extension. Note! Because you cannot call up an archive file in Station, it is a good idea to set up HMIWeb Display Builder so that displays are simultaneously saved in both standard and archive format. To do this, choose Tools > Options and select Save unarchived copy of file with archive files. Archive format is useful if you want to email a display to someone. To save a display/shape in archive format:
8 - 48 • Creating Displays
1.
Choose File > Save As (or Save if saving for the first time).
2.
Select Display Archives from Save as type.
3.
Specify the filename and click Save.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2.12 PMD Display Data Validation 2.12.1 General PMD display data validation consists of two tools: you can either validate the active display or validate all displays located in a defined directory. The tools can be opened from the menu bar by selecting Tools / PMD Validate Display or Tools / PMD Validate Folder. Display data validation can find the following defects: •
A data reference (“PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin”) does not exist in PDS.
•
An empty data reference in a property that must have a proper value, e.g. “Value (+)”.
•
Array index is invalid, e.g. “PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[0]”, “PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[-1]”, or “PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[level]”.
•
A constant is not valid.
Display data validation cannot find the following defects: •
Data type mismatch between the pin and the display element’s property.
•
Usage of array indexing (“PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[1]”), when the pin isn’t an array.
•
The array index is out of the range, e.g. PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[100], when the pin is an array of length <100.
•
Cannot distinguish what part of a data reference is incorrect.
2.12.2 Validate the active display Select Tools->PMD Validate Display to validate the data references of the currently active display in HMIWeb Display Builder. The results are shown in the PMD Validation Results window.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 49
In this example no incorrect data references have been found in the currently active display. Press Close or
to close the PMD Validation Results window.
In the following example incorrect data references have been found in the currently active display:
8 - 50 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2.12.3 Validate displays in a directory Select Tools / PMD Validate Folder to validate the data references of the displays found in the selected Display folder.
Press Browse to browse to the Display folder where the displays to be validated locate. Press Validate to validate the displays that can be found in the Display folder. If the folder contains defective displays, their names will be shown in the Defective displays list box
Press or double click (select) a display in the list box to show the PMD Validation Results. Pressing Close or
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
closes the PMD Validate Folder window.
Creating Displays • 8 - 51
Press Open to open the current display to HMIWeb Display Builder Press
to show the PMD Validate Folder window.
Press
to close the PMD Validation Results window.
2.13 Tools for PMD displays The following tools are run from the Command Prompt and they help to do certain tasks for all PMD displays in a same folder. •
Setting the department name with HDBSetDeptDisplays Changes the department name in all displays in a certain folder.
•
Resaving the displays with HDBOpenSaveDisplays - Opens all displays in a certain folder and requests HMIWeb Display Builder to save them.
Note! HMIWeb PMD must be installed on the machine. Note also! Be sure to start and close HMIWeb Display Builder in the PMD environment (i.e. using –startmode PMD) before using the tools. If HMIWeb Display Builder has been used in other environment, e.g. –startmode ExperionPKS, the tools will not work. However, the startmode is normally defined to be PMD at the software installation stage.
2.13.1 Setting the department name with HDBSetDeptDisplays tool The tool HDBSetDeptDisplays sets the department name in all displays in a folder, including all data references in the displays The tool is run from the Command Prompt. Type the command: C:\MyDisplays>HDBSetDeptDisplays NEWDEPT
8 - 52 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the previous example, the command sets the department name NEWDEPT into all PMD displays and data references in the folder c:\MyDisplays. The following messages will be shown during the run.
Press OK.
Close HMIWeb Display Builders as requested and then press OK. Before processing a display, its name is shown:
Press OK for each display.
When all displays have been processed, the count of displays that were successfully updated is shown, e.g. 5 in the figure above. If there were plain HTML documents or HMIWeb displays that do not have PMD data bound onto them, “Not OK” tells the count of them. Press OK. The displays have now been processed.
2.13.2 Resaving the displays with HDBOpenSaveDisplays tool The tool HDBOpenSaveDisplays simply opens all displays of a folder in HMIWeb Display Builder and requests HMIWeb Display Builder to save them. The tool might be useful in a case where the solutions of data references in HMIWeb displays are not updated correctly into the public groups. When the displays have been re-saved, the public groups will be built again as displays are called up in Station.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 53
Because this tool opens all HTML documents of a folder – both HMIWeb displays and plain HTML documents – in HMIWeb Display Builder, it runs the migration of these files to the latest HMIWeb display format, as would be done if these files were opened in HMIWeb Display Builder by yourself. The tool is run from the Command Prompt. Type the command: C:\MyDisplays>HDBOpenSaveDisplays No parameters are needed. The command above opens and saves displays by HMIWeb Display Builder in the folder “c:\MyDisplays”. The following messages will be shown during the run:
Close HMIWeb Display Builders as requested and then press OK. Before processing a display, its name is shown:
Press OK for each display. When all displays have been processed, the count of displays that were successfully updated is shown, e.g. 5 below. If there were HTML documents which could not be successfully opened and saved in HMIWeb Display Builder, “Not OK” tells the count of them.
Press OK. The displays have now been processed.
8 - 54 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3
Drawing Techniques
3.1
Drawing Techniques - overview These topics describe standard drawing techniques, such as creating, grouping and resizing objects. Note that most of the techniques described here are similar to those used in other Windows-based drawing and paint applications.
3.2
Setting Drawing Defaults When drawing objects, you generally want most of them to have similar characteristics, such as color, line thickness and font. The easiest way of ensuring such uniformity is to set the default values, which are then used whenever you create a new object. Most toolbar buttons show their default settings. For example, if the default text size has been set to 12 points, “12” appears in Font Size. Example Set the default colors to red line and yellow fill: 1. Make sure no object is selected. (If an object is selected, click a blank part of the display, or select Edit / Deselect All.) 2. Click the arrow to the right of to open the color palette.
3.
on the Drawing toolbar
Click the red box.
4. Click the arrow to the right of again.
to open the color palette
5. Click the yellow box.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 55
3.3
Creating Objects You use the Object-creation buttons on the 1.4.3 PMD toolbox Toolbar (and on the 1.4.4 Toolbox Toolbar when required) to create objects. The way in which you use a tool depends on the type of object it creates. The following procedures describe typical creation techniques. To create a regular-shaped object such as a rectangle or pushbutton: 1. Click the appropriate button
,
,
,
or
.
2. Drag the cursor diagonally over the display, and release the mouse button when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape. To create a square/round object, hold down SHIFT while dragging. To create a straight line: 1. Click
.
2. Drag to mark the length and direction of the line. 3. Release the button when the line has the correct length and direction. To draw a line that it is either horizontal, vertical or 45 degrees, hold down SHIFT while dragging. (This also applies when creating segments of a polygon or polyline.) To create a polyline: 1. Click
.
2. Click to mark each node, except for the last. 3. Double-click to mark the last node. To create a polygon: 1. Click
.
2. Click to mark each node, except for the last. 3. Double-click to mark the last node, which also closes the polygon. To create a text box: 1. Click
.
2. Drag the pointer diagonally over the display, and release the mouse button when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape. When you release the mouse button “Text” appears in the box. 3. Type your text. You can start a new paragraph by pressing ENTER. 8 - 56 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To create a hyperlink: .
1.
Click
2.
Drag the pointer diagonally over the display, and release the mouse button when the dotted "outline rectangle" is the correct size and shape. When you release the mouse button "Text" appears in the box.
3.
Delete "Text" and type a suitable the name for the link. (By default, hyperlinks are blue and underlined, but you can change this if appropriate.)
4.
While the object is still selected: a. Open the Properties window. (If it is not visible, click on the View Toolbar.) b. Click the Details tab. c. Specify the link's target, either a Web page or another display. See 5.8.7 Hyperlink.
3.3.1
Creating a Bezier Curve You use the Bezier Curve button to create Bezier curve type of line, such as the one shown in the following picture.
To create a Bezier curve: 1. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
2. Click in the display to mark the first node (start of the curve). 3. Click to mark the first curve control handle. This handle controls the direction at which the curve leaves the first node. 4. Click to mark the second curve control handle. This handle controls the direction at which the curve approaches the second node (end of the curve).
5. Click to mark the second node (end of the curve).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 57
Curve Control Handles A Bezier curve has curve control handles that control the path the curve takes between nodes. The following pictures show how a curve control handle determines: •
The angle at which the curve leaves/reaches the associated node — initially, it goes in the direction of the curve control handle before going towards the other node.
•
The amount the curve deviates from a direct path to the other node — the further the curve control handle is away from its node, the further the curve deviates before going towards the other node.
To change the shape of a Bezier curve after creating it, see 3.16.3 Editing an Object’s Curve Control Handles.
3.3.2
Creating a new object from overlapping objects You can create a new vector graphic object from two or more overlapping vector graphic objects. The following table shows typical results—note, however, that the results depend on the object types and the way they overlap. Notes:
8 - 58 • Drawing Techniques
•
To learn about vector graphic objects, see 5.17 About vector graphic objects.
•
The original objects are deleted.
•
The new object inherits the properties—such as the name, color and line thickness—of the reference object (the first object you select). It also inherits the scripts and dynamic data binding of the reference object.
•
The and buttons are used to combine objects to improve the display's performance—see 3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To create a new object: 1.
Select the overlapping objects.
2.
Click the appropriate button on the Transform toolbar.
If you start with this (the darker object is selected first):
And click this:
You get this:
Union
Difference
Intersection
Exclusive Or
You can only use the button with "open" objects, such as lines and polylines. It is generally used to create a "closed" object from two open objects. (You can then, for example, apply a fill color to the new closed object.)
3.4
Selecting Objects Note! You can also select objects via the Object Explorer. If you want to select all objects in the display, select Edit / Select All. To select one or more objects: 1. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
2. Select the object(s) as appropriate. To select:
Do this:
One object
Click it.
Several objects
Hold down SHIFT and click each object.
Several objects, which are generally close together
Drag the mouse pointer diagonally across the objects. This selects any object that falls entirely within the “selection rectangle” which appears while dragging.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 59
3.4.1
To select:
Do this:
Several objects, some of which are close together
Hold down SHIFT and click each object you want to select. Then, while still holding down SHIFT, drag the mouse cursor diagonally across the other objects — this selects any object that falls entirely within the “selection rectangle” which appears while dragging. You can also reverse the above steps — drag first and then select individual objects.
One object from a stack of objects
Hold down CTRL and click repeatedly until the object you want is selected. Each time you click, the next object in the stack (starting from the top) is selected. Do not click too quickly — if you do, your action will be interpreted as a double-click.
Selection handles When you select an object, a set of eight selection handles appears around the object's boundary. You use these handles when resizing the object.
A Selected Object
3.4.2
Reference Object If you select more than one object, the first object you select is called the reference object. Some drawing techniques make use of a reference object — for example, you can resize objects to make them the same height/width as the reference object. (The selection handles of the reference object are different from the handles of the other objects.)
3.4.3
3.5
Deselecting Objects To deselect:
Do this:
All objects
Click a blank part of the display. (If an object, such as a “background bitmap”, covers the entire display, select Edit => Deselect All.)
One or more objects from a group of selected objects
Hold down SHIFT and click each object you want to deselect.
Deleting Objects To delete one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Press DELETE.
8 - 60 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.6
Resizing Objects To resize one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). Their selection handles appear. 2. Drag one of the selection handles as required. The objects are resized as you drag. If you want to retain the object’s proportions, hold down SHIFT and drag a corner handle. To resize objects so that they are the same size as a reference object: 1. Select the reference object. 2. Select the objects you want to resize. 3. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To make the objects the same:
Click this:
Width as the reference object Height as the reference object Size (width and height) as the reference object
3.7
Duplicating Objects The duplicated object(s) is identical to the original except for the name and position — the duplicated object is offset with respect to the original. The object’s scripts are also duplicated, but any reference to the original object is changed to the duplicated object. For example, if the original script changes the original object’s color, the duplicated script will make the same change to the duplicated object’s color. However, you should carefully check all duplicated scripts to check whether you need to make any further changes. To make duplicate copies of one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Click
3.8
on the Standard toolbar.
Locking Objects Locking objects in place prevents them from being accidentally moved or modified with the mouse. (You can still move and resize a locked object by editing its size and position properties in the Properties window.)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 61
To lock one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). on the Arrange toolbar. Note that the selection 2. Click handles turn grey to indicate that the object is locked.
To unlock a locked object, select it and then click
3.9
a second time.
Aligning Objects To align objects with respect to a reference object (the reference object does not move): 1. Select the reference object. 2. Select the objects you want to align. 3. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To move the objects: Horizontally so that:
Click this: Their left edges are aligned to the left edge of the reference object Their centers are aligned to the center of the reference object Their right edges are aligned to the right edge of the reference object
Vertically so that:
Their tops are aligned at the top edge of the reference object Their centers are aligned to the center of the reference object Their bottoms are aligned at the bottom edge of the reference object
3.10 Distributing Objects Distributing objects means moving them so that their centers are equally spaced horizontally or vertically. When you distribute objects, the outer two objects don’t move — for example, if you select three objects, the inner object moves left/right (or up/down) so that is centered between the two outer objects. To distribute three or more objects: 1. Select the objects. 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar.
8 - 62 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
If you start with this:
And want this:
Click this:
3.11 Grouping Objects You can create a complex object by creating a number of simple objects, arranging them in an appropriate manner and then grouping them. If appropriate, you can “nest” grouped objects to create even more complex objects. When you group a set of objects, you create a group object, which is like any other object - that is, it appears in the Object Explorer, has its own properties and can have its own scripts. If you ungroup a group, you delete the group object, including any scripts attached to it. To group two or more objects: 1. Select the objects. 2. Click on the Arrange toolbar. If the Object Explorer is visible, note that a new group object is created. To ungroup a group select the group and then click
.
Adding objects to (or removing them from) an existing group You can add objects to (or remove them from) an existing group. The advantage of adding/removing objects is that the group (and any scripts attached to it) is not deleted. To add one or more objects to an existing group: 1.
Select the group and the object(s) you want to add.
2.
Choose Arrange > Grouping > Add to Group.
To remove one or more objects from a group: 1.
Using Object Explorer, select the object(s) you want to remove from the group.
2.
Choose Arrange > Grouping > Remove from Group.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 63
3.12 Flipping Objects To flip one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To flip the object(s):
Click this:
Horizontally (as in a mirror image) Vertically (turn it upside down)
3.13 Rotating Objects You can rotate textboxes, graphics and vector graphic objects (to learn about vector graphic objects, see 5.17 About vector graphic objects). Note! If you rotate a group or a shape that contains objects that cannot be rotated, those objects will not rotate. To rotate one or more objects 90 degrees: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To rotate the object(s):
Click this:
90 degrees clockwise 90 degrees anti-clockwise
To rotate an object through any angle: 1. Select the object(s). on the Toolbox toolbar. Four rotation handles 2. Click appear.
3. Drag one of the rotation handles clockwise or anticlockwise. As you drag the handle, the object rotates about its center.
3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance You can improve the performance of a display by combining static vector graphic objects—this converts them into a single metafile, which is easier to render.
8 - 64 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Note! To learn about vector graphic objects, see 5.17 About vector graphic objects. Combining objects disables any scripts and database links they may have.
To combine vector graphic objects: 1.
Select the objects.
2.
on the Arrange toolbar to group the objects. (You Click must group the objects before combining them.)
3.
Click
on the Transform toolbar.
If the Object Explorer is visible, note how the group is converted into a single object—that is, it changes from this to this
.
To uncombine a previously combined object: 1.
Select the object and then click
.
The object reverts to a group object. If necessary, you can then click on the Arrange Toolbar to ungroup the objects within the group.
3.15 Changing the Stacking Order When objects overlap, you may need to change the order in which they are stacked on top of each other — unless an object is transparent, it will obscure any objects that are stacked underneath it. Objects are initially stacked in the order in which you create them — that is, each new object is added to the top of the stack. To move one or more objects up or down the stack: 1. Select the objects. 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To move the object(s):
Click this:
To the front (top) of the stack To the back (bottom) of the stack One layer up (towards the top of) the stack One layer down (towards the bottom of) the stack
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 65
3.16 Using the Node Editor You use the Toolbox toolbar's Node Editor button to change an object’s shape by moving or adding nodes. The nodes are the object’s apexes or reference points. Note! Some types of object, such as rectangles and ovals, must be first converted to a path (line) before you can select the Node Editor. To convert an object to a path, select it and then click Convert to Path button
on the Transform toolbar.
3.16.1 Editing an Object’s Nodes To edit an object’s nodes: 1. Select the object. on the Toolbox toolbar. A small square marks 2. Click each of the object’s nodes.
3. Move the mouse pointer over a node and drag the node as required.
3.16.2 Adding a Node You can also change an object’s shape by adding a node between two existing nodes. To add a node: 1. Select the object. 2. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
3. Move the mouse pointer over the line between two existing nodes. 8 - 66 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4. Click when the cursor turns into a “cross-hair” — this adds the new node.
5. You can now move this node like any other node.
3.16.3 Editing an Object’s Curve Control Handles Some types of object, such Bezier curves, have curve control handles that control the path the line takes between nodes. See 3.3.1. Creating a Bezier Curve. To edit an object’s curve control handles: 1.
Select the object.
2.
Click
3.
Move the mouse pointer over a curve control handle and drag it to a new position.
4.
Release the curve control handle to see the result.
5.
If the result is not satisfactory, repeat steps 3 and 4.
(Node Editor) on the Toolbox toolbar.
3.17 Moving Objects with the Arrow Keys If you want to move an object a small distance — a technique called nudging — you may find it easier to use the arrow keys than to use the mouse. Each time you press an arrow key, the selected object(s) move one pixel in the direction of the arrow. If you hold down an arrow key, the selected object(s) move slowly in the direction of the arrow. If you hold down SHIFT and an arrow key, the objects move five times faster.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 67
3.18 Defining an object’s color You use the and color of objects.
buttons on the Drawing Toolbar to define the
For example, to change the fill color of one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s) whose fill color you want to change. 2. If you want to: −
Apply the default color (as shown on the button), click .
−
Apply another standard color, click the arrow to the right of button and select the color you want.
−
Apply a non-standard color, see 3.18.1 Selecting a Non-standard Color.
−
Remove the existing color, so that the object becomes invisible (transparent), click the arrow to the right of button and select No Fill.
−
Apply a gradient fill (where two colors blend into each other), see 3.18.2 Applying a Gradient Fill.
3.18.1 Selecting a Non-standard Color For example, to select a custom fill color: 1. Click the arrow to the right of button and click More Fill Colors to open the Color dialog box.
2. Click the point in the “color spectrum” box that has the color you want and then adjust the slider on the “luminance box” (the thin bar on the right). Tip! Alternatively, type the HSL or RGB values in the appropriate boxes. 3. Click the Add to Custom Colors button so that the color appears in the next available Custom colors box. 4. Click the custom color you have just created and then click OK.
8 - 68 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.18.2 Applying a Gradient Fill With a gradient fill, one color is applied to the center of the object and another color is applied to the edges (top/bottom or left/right). In between, the color gradually changes between the two colors.
Typical Gradient Fills — Horizontal (left) and Vertical (right)
Note! You can only apply a gradient fill to some types of object, such as rectangles, ovals and wedges. To apply a gradient fill to one or more objects: 1. Select the objects. the arrow to the right of button and click Fill 2. Click Effects to open the Fill Effects dialog box. 3. Select Horizontal Gradient or Vertical Gradient as appropriate. 4. Select the appropriate Fill Color (center color) and Gradient Color (edge color). 5. Select the appropriate Focus. (The focus defines the relative position between the edges, where the fill color is “pure”. 50% represents the center.) Tip! The Preview box gives an idea of what the gradient will look like. 6. Click OK.
3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants In some cases you may need to define object's colors by using constants in the PMD Data Tab of the Properties Window. Color properties exist e.g. in the PMD Data Tab of Numerical Entry, Text Entry and Entry objects. To define a color, uncheck first the Connect to block pin check box and select the data type String in the Data field of the PMD Data tab. A color is defined by typing either its name (like red) or the RGB color code (like #FF0000 is red). An RGB color code consists of three two-digit hexadecimal numbers specifying the intensity of the corresponding color.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 69
The following table lists the colors ed as of Internet Explorer.
8 - 70 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.19 Undoing Your Work You use the and buttons on the Standard toolbar to undo changes you have made to a display — in effect the buttons work in a similar manner to the Forward and Reverse buttons on a video recorder. Each time you click
, you go undo one change in the sequence of
changes. If you go back too many steps, use
to retrace your steps.
If you click the arrow to the right of a button, the list of actions appears. The most recent action is at the top. You can simultaneously undo/redo several actions by moving the cursor down the list — the actions are selected as the cursor moves over them — and then clicking. The maximum number of changes you can undo is specified in the General tab of the Options window — see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
3.20 Inserting a Graphic Inserting digitized photographs, schematic drawings and other suitable graphics can significantly enhance your displays. Notes: •
The inserted graphics are copies of the original graphics, which means that the display will not be updated if you subsequently change the original graphics.
•
Inserting a large graphic, or many small ones, may affect Station's performance when the display is called up.
•
To learn about the graphic formats that HMIWeb Display Builder s, see 3.20.1 About graphic formats.
To insert a graphic: 1. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
2. Move the pointer to the display and drag it diagonally to mark the rectangle where you want to insert the graphic. 3. When the rectangle is the correct size/shape and you release the mouse button, the Insert Picture dialog box appears. (The graphic takes on the size and shape of the rectangle that appears while you are dragging.) Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 71
4. Select the graphic and click Open to insert it. 5. If necessary, move and resize the graphic.
Inserting a Graphic from the Clipboard If you are working simultaneously with HMIWeb Display Builder and another drawing application, you can insert graphics via the clipboard. To insert a graphic from the clipboard: 1. Create the graphic and then copy it to the clipboard. 2. Switch to HMIWeb Display Builder and indicate where you want to center the graphic by clicking the center point. 3. Press CTRL+P to paste it into the display. The Save As dialog box appears. (Save the graphic with a suitable name.) The inserted graphic has the same size and shape as in the other drawing application. 4. If necessary, move, resize and group the graphic.
3.20.1 About graphic formats The ideal format for a particular graphic depends on several factors, such its contents (such as a photograph or schematic drawing), its size and its complexity. In practice, it is a good idea to perform some tests to determine which format best suites a particular need. There are two basic types of graphic format: •
Bitmap. Bitmaps consist of an array of colored pixels. Examples of bitmaps are digitized photographs and screen captures. Bitmaps are created in "paint" programs such as Adobe Photoshop and Jasc Paint Shop Pro.
•
Vector graphic formats. Vector graphics consist of "linebased" objects similar to HMIWeb's inbuilt vector graphic objects—see 5.17About vector graphic objects. Examples of vector graphics are schematic drawings and floor plans. Vector graphics are created in "drawing" programs such as Autodesk AutoCAD, Adobe Illustrator and Microsoft Visio.
The following scenarios illustrate how to choose an appropriate format:
8 - 72 • Drawing Techniques
•
You have an AutoCAD drawing of a plant layout that you want to use as a background to your display. In this case, you save the graphic in WMF or EMF format.
•
You want to include a high-quality photograph in your display. In this case, you save the photograph in JPG format.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
•
You want to have overlapping objects, but don't want an object on top to totally obscure the one below. In this case, you save the graphic in PNG format.
The following table lists the graphic formats ed by HMIWeb Display Builder, and summarizes some of their major distinguishing features. Format
Features
Bitmap GIF (*.gif)
Only s 256 colors. Very small file size. Only s on/off transparency.
Portable Network Graphic (*.png)
s many colors. The file size depends on the complexity of the image and number of colors used. s 256 levels of transparency.
Windows Bitmap (*.bmp) Optimized for photographs and other continuous tone images. Note that JPEG uses "lossy" compression which loses some of the original image data. This means that you should keep the original image (at least until the display has been thoroughly tested) in case you need to make any changes.
JPEG (*.jpg)
Vector graphic Metafile (*.wmf)
Suitable for schematic drawings and floor plans.
Enhanced Metafile (*.emf)
An enhanced version of WMF. Suitable for schematic drawings and floor plans.
3.21 Inserting Text from Another Application You can use the clipboard to insert text from other applications. For example, if you want to include a large block of text in your display, you may find it easier to compose it in a text editor or word processor. Note! Formatting is ignored when the text is pasted from the clipboard. (The Paste function ignores everything except the text.) If the text includes HTML/XML tags, the effect may be undefined. To insert text into a display: 1. Copy the text to the clipboard from the other application. 2. Switch to HMIWeb Display Builder and indicate where you want to center the text by clicking the center point. 3. Click
to paste it into the display.
4. If necessary, move, resize and group the text. Tip! If the text block is large, it is easier to use the Properties window to resize the block.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 73
3.22 Inserting an ActiveX Document You can insert an ActiveX document into “window” that is embedded into a display. (Scrollbars appear if the document is larger than the window). ActiveX documents include Microsoft Word documents, and Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. To insert an ActiveX document: 1. Click on the Toolbox toolbar and then drag diagonally across the display to mark size and position of the window for the document. 2. Open the Properties window and click on the Details tab. 3. Type the name of the document in File Name (or click Browse and search for the document).
3.23 Inserting an ActiveX Control Caution! Because of the extremely varied nature of ActiveX controls, you should thoroughly test the operation of displays that include ActiveX controls before releasing them to operators.
Note! The effects of inserting an ActiveX control vary widely, according to the nature of the control. Some controls may, for example, initiate ing and installation of control-related components. If any security-related warning appears, check that it is appropriate to the control you are inserting before proceeding. If you are unsure, you should refer to the relevant Microsoft documentation. Some controls add specialized properties to the Properties window, which you must define. (Refer to the documentation/help supplied with the control for details.) To insert an ActiveX control: 1. Click the arrow to the right of to select the control.
on the Toolbox toolbar
2. Drag diagonally across the display to mark size and position of the “window” for the control. 3. Open the Properties window and configure the control’s properties as appropriate.
8 - 74 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.24 URL Formats The general format for the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of a file or Web site is: Protocol:// ResourceName Part
Description
Protocol
The protocol, which can be http, ftp, gopher, or file. The default protocol is file. If the protocol is not specified, Station assumes that the URL refers to a file, either on the Station computer or on the network.
ResourceName
The resource address or identifier, such as a file or Web address. If the extension is not specified, Station assumes that it is a display file.
Examples The URL for a HTML file called “procedure.htm”, can be specified as either: file://c:\procs\procedure.htm or: c:\procs\procedure.htm The URL for a Web address: http://www.ourwebsite.com The URL for a Word file called “sp.doc”: file://c:\procs\sp.doc
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 75
4
PMD Object Properties
4.1
PMD Object Properties – overview You access the properties of the selected object(s) through the Properties window. You can call up the Properties window for an object •
by double-clicking the object.
•
by clicking the (Properties window) on the View toolbar. Note! Make sure the correct object is selected.
•
by right-clicking the object and selecting Edit Properties from the menu opened.
The following sections contain detailed descriptions for the Properties in each Tab of the Properties window. For short object specific descriptions see section 4.6 PMD Data Tab.
4.2
Animation Tab The animation tab is used to define the number of shapes in a object. The tab only appears if you select the Shape Sequence Animation (FC data) behavior on the Behaviors Tab. This tab only appears for the shape objects (i.e. Shape sequence or Dynamic Shape object which you insert by using the toolbox toolbar).
8 - 76 • PMD Object Properties
Insert shape from file button in the PMD
Property
Description
Number of shapes
Specifies the number of shapes you use.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.3
Behaviors Tab The Behaviors tab specifies which behaviors are attached to the object. When you select a behavior from the Behaviors tab, the related tabs appears, which you then use to configure the behavior’s properties. For some behaviors you need only one tab to configure properties, whereas for others you need several tabs. Example, if you select Popup behavior, you use only the Popup tab to configure the properties. If you select the Toggle behavior, you need Toggle and PMD Data tabs to configure the properties.
The behavior list indicates which behaviors are available for the object. Description provides a brief description of the behavior. The following table describes the standard behaviors supplied with PMD Objects. Note, all these behaviors are not available for all the objects and some other behaviors may also be supplied for specialized tasks. Behavior
Description
Display Link
When defined this behavior allows the to call up another display by clicking the object in interface (Station). Adds the Link Tab, which you use to specify the display you want to call up.
Faceplate (FC data)
When defined this behavior allows the to call up a faceplate by clicking the object in interface (Station). This behavior is checked as default for the "symbol" objects: One-way Motor, One-way Motor (pump), Two-way Motor, Two-speed Motor, Valve, Three-way Valve, Vertical Spindle Valve, Motor Valve, Device Control 2/2, Device Control 4/3, General Logic and Binary You use the PMD Data Tab to define the block of which faceplate you call up.
Level Fill
"Level indicator" behavior, which is only applicable to some types of object, such as rectangles and ovals. The “level” of the object’s fill color varies in accordance with the value. Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to specify the value (block.pin) details .
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 77
Behavior
Description
Popup
When defined this behavior allows the to call up a popup by clicking the object in interface (Station). Adds the Popup Tab, which you use to define the popup information. For an introduction to popups, see 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate.
Toggle
When defined this behavior allows the to send the signal status from the source to destination. Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to define the signal source and destination. Adds the Toggle Tab, which you use to define the value to be sent to the destination and the acknowledgement for the action. (If you select the Acknowledge property in the Toggle Tab, the object will furthermore get the Entry Tab, which you then use to define the acknowledgement.)
Task
Only applicable to entry objects (Numerical Entry, Text Entry and Entry). Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to define the task source and destination address. If the destination is an array the first array index is updated. Adds the Task Tab, which you use to define the value to be sent to the destination.
Shape Sequence Animation (FC data)
Only applicable to shape objects (created by the Insert Shape from file button). Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to specify the value. Adds the Animation Tab, which you use to define the number of shapes. See also 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence.
To define a behavior: 1. Open the object's Properties window and open the Behaviors tab. 2. Select the behavior you want to define. 3. If any new tabs appear, open them and define the behavior’s properties. See instructions for the tab in question.
4.4
Colors Tab The Colors tab controls the object’s colors. The number of colored elements depends on the object’s type. For example, a rectangle has line and fill colors, whereas an Alphanumeric object also has a text color.
8 - 78 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.5
Property
Description
Fill Color
The object’s fill color.
Line Color
The object’s line color.
Level Fill Color
Only applicable to some objects. The color of the bar or pointer used to indicate the value.
Text Color
The text color. Only applicable to objects with text, such as Text Output and Static Pushbutton.
Custom Properties Tab
This Custom Properties Tab is only applicable to a dynamic shape that is inserted into a display. For details how to use this tab, see 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
4.6
PMD Data Tab You use the PMD Data tab to specify the object’s link (data connections) to the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. For some types of objects, such as rectangle and oval, this tab only appears if you select the Level Fill or Toggle behavior on the Behaviors Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 79
Note! Data connections can be made only to the same department, in which the display is saved. (In Experion PKS with PMD Controller system, references between departments can be used only between PMD Controllers.)
The following table contains those PMD Data tab properties that are common to all objects. Property
Description
Property list
Shows all the data properties, which you use to transfer data between the object and the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. At least properties with the (+) mark must be defined. For details about data properties of each object, see the following sections.
Parameters:
Check this checkbox to connect the block.pin data to the property, which is highlighted in the Property list. Uncheck to connect a constant value.
Connect to block.pin. Uncheck for constant value:
Data
The data format for process data is: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN The proper format for defining color by using constant is either the RGB color code (#FF0000) or the name of the color (Red). See 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants. Use the Data field to select the data type for the constant value. The available data types are: Boolean Value may be either TRUE or FALSE. Since the Boolean value is non-numerical, it can be said that: 1 = true, 0 = false and false < true. String: Any character string. Some blank characters, like
,
and tab are not allowed.
8 - 80 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Note! If you use the String data type to define a (text)vector, the proper syntax is: #sarr#First#Second#Third..., where •
the first character (here #) is the separator used between text elements
•
the sarr means that this is a SAFEARRAY
•
First, Second, Third, etc. are text elements, which must be separated by the separator (here #).
Float (32 bit): Max value 3.402823466e+38, Min value 1.175494351e-38 Double (64 bit): Max value1.7976931348623158e+308, Min value 2.2250738585072014e-308 Integer (16 bit): Integer with a sign -32768…32767. LongInteger (32 bit): Integer with a sign –2147483648…2147483647.
In the following there are the descriptions for the PMD Data tab's properties that are specific for each object. (Objects are in the same order as they are located in the PMD Toolbox toolbar.)
4.6.1
Static objects PMD Toolbox contains the following static objects: •
Static Rectangle
•
Static Rounded Rectangle
•
Static Oval
•
Static Line
•
Static Polyline
•
Static Polygon
•
Static Bezier Curve
•
Static Arc
•
Static Wedge
•
Static Textbox
•
Static Pushbutton
The PMD Data tab only appears for static objects if you select the Toggle or Level Fill behavior on the Behaviors Tab. Note, that the Level Fill behavior is only applicable to "area" objects, i.e. rectangle, oval, polygon, and wedge. If you select the Toggle behavior on the Behaviors tab the following properties output on the PMD Data tab: Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+) Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab. PMD Object Properties • 8 - 81
If you select the Level Fill behavior on the Behaviors tab the following properties output on the PMD Data tab: Property
Description
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+) LowerLimit (+)
4.6.2
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab. Example of data connection for Value property: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.SET
Hyperlink Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
4.6.3
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Filled Rectangle Object description: Fills a rectangular area with a color, which is defined by using constant or process data (can be vector). It is possible to change/take off the color (Filled property). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
Fill Filled
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = The rectangle is filled with the color defined by the BackgroundColor property. False (or 0) = The rectangle is filled with the color defined by the Fill Color property in the Colors tab.
Colors BackgroundColor (+)
Fill color. Vector can also be used. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BackgroundColorIndex
Index for the BackgroundColor property when it is a vector.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. See also 4.17 Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
8 - 82 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.4
Filled Oval Object description: Fills an oval/round area with a color, which is defined by using constant or process data (can be vector). It is possible to change/take off the color (Filled property). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
Fill Filled
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = The oval is filled with the color defined in BackgroundColor property. False (or 0) = The oval is filled with the color defined by the Fill Color property in the Colors tab.
Colors BackgroundColor (+)
Fill color. Vector can also be used.
BackgroundColorIndex
Index for the BackgroundColor property when it is a vector.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.5
Filled Polygon Object description: Fills a polygon area with a color, which is defined by using constant or process data (can be vector). It is possible to change/take off the color (Filled property). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
Fill Filled
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = The polygon is filled with the color defined in BackgroundColor property. False (or 0) = The polygon is filled with the color defined by the Fill Color property in the Colors tab.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 83
Property
Description
Colors BackgroundColor (+)
Fill color. Vector can also be used. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BackgroundColorIndex
Index for the BackgroundColor property when it is a vector.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.6
Blinking rectangle Object description: Rectangular area, which blinks between two colors, if the Blink property is on. The Blink property can be on or off. Colors (fill color and blink color) are defined by using constants or process data (can be vectors). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
General Color (+)
Fill color when the Blink = false or is not defined. Vector can also be used. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BlinkColor (+)
Blink color when the Blink = true. The color of the area changes between the colors defined in Color property and BlinkColor property. Vector can also be used.
Control (+)
Index for the Color and BlinkColor properties when they are vectors. Define Control = 0, if Color and BlinkColor properties are not vectors.
Blink (+)
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = Blinking on. False (or 0) = Blinking off.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
8 - 84 • PMD Object Properties
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.7
Numerical Output Object description: Shows a process value with possible engineering unit. Shows alarm and warning states with default colors. If alarm is not acknowledged the value blinks. Default appearance for the value is a 32 bit float with two decimals in a field with transparent background and no border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. Alarm and warning colors and the process value engineering unit can be localized. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES
EngineeringUnit
Process value engineering unit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LPC_UnitText
Alarm UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledge state. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the value blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
4.6.8
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Numerical Entry Object description: Object is used to show and enter process value (the Value property) Object shows also the value's engineering unit as well as alarm and warning states with default colors. If alarm is not acknowledged the value blinks. Default appearance for the value is a 32 bit float with two decimals in a field with white background and Inset line style (Style property in the Line Tab). In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 85
Alarm and warning colors and the process value engineering unit can be localized. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.SET
EngineeringUnit
Process value engineering unit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LPC_UnitText
Limits
Note! If you use constant values as limits, the value type must be: float, double, integer or longinteger.
UpperLimit (+)
Process value entry upper limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
LowerLimit (+)
Process value entry lower limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
Colors Fill
Value background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Value color.
Alarm UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledge state. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the value blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Task TaskSource (+) TaskDestination (+)
4.6.9
These properties only appear if you select Task on the Behaviors Tab. (See also Task Tab.)
Text Output Object description: Shows text (String data type). Default appearance is text in a field with transparent background and no border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. The text can be localized. Note! If variable text (such as time stamp) is displayed continually in the display object, remove the Localization selection. Otherwise the localization database size limit can exceed.
8 - 86 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
General Value (+)
Text (String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.10 Conditional Text Output Object description: Shows text (String data type) conditionally controlled by the Visible property. Default appearance is text in a field with yellow background and black border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. The text can be localized. Note! If variable text (such as time stamp) is displayed continually in the display object, remove the Localization selection. Otherwise the localization database size limit can exceed. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Text (String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Visible (+)
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = Text visible. False (or 0) = Text not visible. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Fill
Text background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Text color.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.11 Text Entry Object description: Object is used to show and enter text (Value property). Default appearance is text in the field with white background and Inset line style (Style property in the Line Tab) In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 87
The text can be localized. Note! If variable text (such as time stamp) is displayed continually in the display object, do not select Localization. Otherwise the localization database size limit can exceed. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Text (String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Fill
Text background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Text color.
Task TaskSource (+) TaskDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Task on the Behaviors Tab. (See also Task Tab.)
4.6.12 Entry Object description: Object is used to enter (Value property). The characters are shown as asterisks (****). Default appearance is black asterisk characters in a field with white background and Inset line style (Style property in the Line Tab) In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. Property
Description
General Value (+)
(String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Fill
Text background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Text color
Task TaskSource (+) TaskDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Task on the Behaviors Tab. (See also Task Tab.)
4.6.13 Signal Controlled Text Object description: Shows text (Text property) and blinking text (BlinkText property) controlled by a signal (Blink property). Default appearance is text in a field with transparent background and no border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. The text and blinking text can be localized. 8 - 88 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
General Text
Text shown in normal state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
BlinkText
Text shown in blinking state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
TextIndex
Index for the Text and BlinkText properties when they are vectors.
Colors Fill
Backround color shown in normal state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BlinkFill
Backround color shown in blinking state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
FillIndex
Index for the Fill and BlinkFill properties when they are vectors.
Font
Text font color shown in normal state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
BlinkFont
Text font color shown in blinking state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
FontIndex
Index for the Font and BlinkFont properties when they are vectors.
Blink Blink
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = Blink on. False (or 0) = Blink off. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.14 Bar Object description: Shows a process value by means of bar or pointer indicator inside the field. The direction how the indicator moves (bottom to top or left to right) and the indicator type (bar or pointer) are defined in the Details Tab. Default appearance is the bar type indicator in a field, which bottom edge represents the lower limit of the process value and the top edge represents the upper limit of the process value. It is possible to define upper and lower warning limits and upper and lower alarm limit for the process value. In case the process value is outside the warning or alarm limit the object shows the indicator with the default warning/alarm color. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 89
Alarm and warning colors can be localized. Property
Description
General BarValue (+)
The bar value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES
Limits ValueUpperLimit (+)
Upper limit of the BarValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
ValueLowerLimit (+)
Lower limit of the BarValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
Alarm UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Colors BarColor
The color of the bar. If not defined, the default LevelFillColor (in the Colors Tab) will be used.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.15 PistonBar Object description: Shows two process values (BarValue and PistonValue) graphically overlapping. The PistonValue indicator starts always from the "top" of the BarValue indicator and grows to the opposite direction. This means that if the BarValue changes, the origin of the PistonValue changes too. In this example picture (where the scale is added by using the Static Textbox object) the BarValue is 70 and the PistonValue is 50. The ValueUpperLimit of the values is 100. The direction of the BarValue (bottom to top or left to right), and the PistonValue's indicator type (bar or pointer) are defined in the Details Tab. The upper and lower limits for the BarValue and PistonValue are defined by using the properties ValueUpperLimit and ValueLower. It is possible to define upper and lower alarm limits and upper and lower warning limit for the values as well. In case the value is outside the warning or alarm limit the object shows the indicator with the default warning/alarm color. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. 8 - 90 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Alarm and warning colors can be localized. Property
Description
General BarValue (+)
The bar value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES
PistonValue (+)
The piston value.
Limits ValueUpperLimit(+)
Upper limit for the BarValue and PistonValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
ValueLowerLimit(+)
Lower limit of the BarValue and PistonValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
Alarm UpperAlarm
Bar upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Bar lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Bar upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Bar lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
PistonAlarm PSUpperAlarm
Piston upper alarm limit.
PSLowerAlarm
Piston lower alarm limit.
PSUpperWarning
Piston upper warning limit.
PSLowerWarning
Piston lower warning limit.
Colors BarColor
The color of the bar. If not defined, the default LevelFillColor will be used.
PistonColor
The color of the piston. If not defined, the default FillColor will be used.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.16 Profile For more detailed descriptions of Profile object properties see section 4.18 Profile object Design Guide. Property
Description
Series_1 ValueArray1
The array that provides the process data values to the series 1 (curve 1)
ColorArray1
The array that provides the colors for the process data values of the series 1.
FirstIndex1 LastIndex1
The number of values that belong to the series 1. Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values that belong to the series 1.
FirstVisible1
The number of values that are shown by the series 1.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 91
Property
Description
LastVisible1
Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values to be shown.
ScaleMinimum1
The X-axis scale. Enter the desired minimum and maximum values. Use the Scale properties in the Series Tab to complete the definition of X-axis scale. Note! If you do not define the ScaleMinimum and ScaleMaximum properties, the X-axis scale is the scale of the series that has most values.
ScaleMaximum1
UpperAlarmLimit1 UpperWarningLimit1 LowerWarningLimit1 LowerAlarmLimit1
Limits that observe values, which exceed or fall below a warning or alarm level. If the limits are connected, they are shown as horizontal lines over the profile object. The values exceeding or falling below limits are shown with separate colors. Note! Each series has its own limits.
ComparisonLevel1
Use this property to define the level on which the Xaxis is drawn, if you are defining a series with twosided plot (the PlotMethod property is True). This property has no meaning, if you are defining a series with one-sided plot (the PlotMethod property is False).
PlotMethod1
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = two sided plot. False (or 0) = one-sided plot.
Series_2
See Series_1
Series_3
See Series_1
Series_4
See Series_1
Series_5
See Series_1
Series_6
See Series_1
General Direction
Drawing direction for all the series of the object. This property cannot be set independently for each series. True (or an integer not equal to 0) = the series are drawn from right to left. False (or 0) = the series are drawn from left to right.
4.6.17 Table For more detailed descriptions of Table object properties see section 4.19 Table object Design Guide. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Data vector of the table.
Visibility
Data visibility vector. Index value = True (or an integer not equal to 0) => Corresponding data visible. Index value = False (or 0) => Corresponding data not visible.
RowCount (+)
Number of rows in the table.
ColCount (+)
Number of columns in the table.
Limits ValueUpperLimit ValueLowerLimit 8 - 92 • PMD Object Properties
Data entry upper and lower limits. Significant only if the property Lock values in this Spread is unchecked in the Settings Tab. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Appearance BackGColor
Table background color.
ForeColor
Table text color.
Headers ColumnHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?A?B?C?D?E?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between column headers.
RowHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?1?2?3?4?5?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between row headers.
Vector FirstElementIndex (+)
The first index of the data vector to be shown in the table.
NumberOfElements (+)
Number of consecutive indexes shown.
NumberOfModulo (+)
Number of consecutive indexes not shown.
CharsFromVector
Number of characters shown in each index (string data type).
4.6.18 Mode Object description: Outputs the mode (Manual, Automatic, Computer, Cascade or Service) of the tag block (point). The mode is presented as a text. The visibility of the object can be controlled by the HideMode property. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Mode texts can be localized. Property
Description
General HideMode
Object hiding (boolean). HideMode = 0 (false) =>Object visible HideMode = 1 (true) =>Object not visible
Modes MDEMode
Mode control. MDEMode = 0 => Manual mode MDEMode = 1 => Automatic mode
CMMMode
Mode control. CMMMode = 1 => Computer mode
CSMMode
Mode control. CSMMode = 1 => Cascade mode
SERMode
Mode control. SERMode = 1 => Service mode
ModeTexts Manual
Manual mode text
Automatic
Automatic mode text
Computer
Computer mode text
Cascade
Cascade mode text
Service
Service mode text
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 93
Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.19 One-way Motor or One-way Motor (Pump) Objects' descriptions: The One-way Motor object outputs a one-way motor symbol and the One-way Motor (Pump) object outputs a pump symbol. The states of the motor/pump are shown by different colors; as default the stop state color is white, run state color is green, information state color is yellow and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General Run (+)
Running information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.RNG
Information
Project specific information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.INF
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.20 Two-way Motor or Two-speed Motor Objects' descriptions: The Two-way Motor object outputs a two-way motor symbol where the arrowhead beside the symbol indicates the current motor run direction. The Two-speed Motor object outputs a two-speed motor symbol where the number 1 or 2 beside the symbol indicates the current motor run speed. The states of the motors are shown by different colors; as default the stop state color is white, run state color is green, information state color is yellow and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized.
8 - 94 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General Run 1 (+)
Running direction/speed 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.RN1
Run 2 (+)
Running direction/speed 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.RN2
Information
Project specific information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.INF
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.21 Valve Object description: The Valve object outputs an open/closed valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different colors; as default the close state color is white, open state color is green, "between" state color is yellow, "both on" state color is purple and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
Control Open (+)
Open limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
Closed (+)
Closed limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 95
Property
Description
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.22 Three-way Valve Object description: The Three-way Valve object outputs a three-way valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different system defined colors; as default the alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General Control (+)
Control state limit data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
Idle (+)
Idle state limit data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.23 Vertical Spindle Valve or Motor Valve Objects' descriptions: The Vertical Spindle Valve object outputs a symbol for a vertical spindle valve and Motor Valve object outputs a symbol for a motor valve. The states of the valves are shown by different colors; as default the close state color is white, open state color is green, "between" state color is yellow, "both on" state color is purple and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. 8 - 96 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Control Open
Open limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
Closed
Closed limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.24 Device Control 2/2 Object description: Device Control 2/2 object outputs a 2/2 hydraulic directional valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different colors; as default the alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General State1 (+)
Limit data 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
State2 (+)
Limit data 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+) Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab. PMD Object Properties • 8 - 97
4.6.25 Device Control 3/4 Object description: Device Control 3/4 object displays a 3/4 hydraulic directional valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different colors; as default the alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General State1 (+)
Limit data 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS1
State2 (+)
Limit data 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS2
State3 (+)
Limit data 3. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSM
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.26 General Logic Object description: General Logic object displays a symbol for a logic control. The symbol indicates also alarms. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default for the objects. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
Alarm Alarm (+)
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged (+)
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+) 8 - 98 • PMD Object Properties
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.27 Binary Object description: Binary object displays a symbol that can be used to display the states of one or two binary data items with desired colors. The colors are defined by using the properties Limit1Color0, Limit1Color1 and Limit2Color0, Limit2Color1. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default for the objects. The other available behaviors can also be added to the objects. Property
Description
Control Limit1 (+)
Limit data 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS1
Limit2 (+)
Limit data 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS2
Limit1Color0 (+)
The color when Limit1 = false. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO1. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Limit1Color1 (+)
The color when Limit1 = true. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO2
Limit2Color0 (+)
The color when Limit2 = false. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO3
Limit2Color1 (+)
The color when Limit2 = true. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO4
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.28 Binary Button Object description: Object creates a push button, which the can press in the interface to change the signal state from 0 to 1 and vice versa. As default the button's alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the texts and colors can be localized. Property
Description
Signal Signal (+)
The signal (0/1) data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Signal0Color
The color of the push button as the signal state is 0.
Signal1Color
The color of the push button as the signal state is 1.
Texts Signal0Text
The text in the push button as the signal state is 0.
Signal1Text
The text in the push button as the signal state is 1.
Alarm Alarm
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR PMD Object Properties • 8 - 99
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
4.6.29 Signal Button Object description: Object creates a push button, which the can press in the interface (Station) to "feed" the state 1 to the signal. The signal state is 1 as long as the keeps the push button depressed. As the releases the push button the signal state returns to 0. The description text can be localized. Property
Description
General Signal (+)
The signal (0/1) data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Text Text
The description text in the push button
4.6.30 Checkbox (FC data) Object description: Displays a checkbox that the can use to select or deselect an option in the interface (Station). Default appearance is a checkbox with a label text on its right side with transparent background color and no borderlines. The label text is defined in the Details Tab. Property
Description
General Value
Process value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.31 Combobox (FC data) Object description: Displays a combobox, which is used in the interface (Station) to select the proper option as required. The options to be shown in the combobox can be localized. Property
Description
General
8 - 100 • PMD Object Properties
Items (+)
Options to be shown in the combobox. Typically a data vector is used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
SelectedItem (+)
The index of the property that is selected from the list and sent to the system.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.32 Insert ActiveX Document See also 3.22 Inserting an ActiveX Document. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.33 Insert Picture from file See also 3.20 Inserting a Graphic. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.34 Insert Shape from File See also chapters 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence and 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.35 Insert ActiveX Control See also 3.23 Inserting an ActiveX Control. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.36 Alphanumeric (FC data) Note! Alphanumeric (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar. Property
Description
Value
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES)
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 101
4.6.37 Indicator (FC data) Note! Indicator (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar. Property
Description
Value
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES)
UpperLimit
Process value entry upper limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
LowerLimit
Process value entry lower limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
4.7
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
PMD Blocks Tab You use the PMD Blocks tab to change the department name or the block names used in data connections of the selected objects. To change the block names you can use either the Replace or Rename function.
8 - 102 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Note! When you select the Rename function in the Task field, the New name field appears instead of the Replace and With fields.
4.7.1
Changing the department name for the data connections
Property
Description
Departments
In the Departments combobox select the department, which name you want to change. In the New department field write the new department name and press the Change department button. The new department name will be updated for the data connections of the object(s) in question. (The new department name replaces the old department name in the Departments combobox. The Blocks of the selected department list will be updated, because the new department may already have blocks defined.)
New department Change department
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 103
4.7.2
Changing (Replace) the block names for the data connections You can use the Replace function to replace one or several identical character strings by a new string and you can select one or several blocks as the target of the function.
8 - 104 • PMD Object Properties
Property
Description
Departments
In the Departments combobox select the department. (The Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field shows the block defined for the selected department.)
Blocks of the selected department
Use the Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field to select the block(s), which name(s) you want to replace. To select several successive blocks, hold the Shift key down and click the first and last block names you want to select. To select some separate blocks, hold the Ctrl key down and click the names of blocks you want to select.
Task
Select Replace
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Replace
In the Replace field write the character string to be replaced and in the With field write the character string that will replace.
With
Example 1 (See the previous picture). You want to replace the character string 03 with the string 05 in the end of all the block names. Select all the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write 03 in the Replace field and write 05 in the With field. Change blocks
Click Change blocks. The new names of blocks output to the New column in the right of the Blocks of the selected department field.
The new names are updated to the Old column when you - reselect the department - open another tab and then the PMD Blocks tab again - close and open the Properties window. Example 2. You want to add character A to the end of all the block names. Select all the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write 3 in the Replace field and write 3A in the With field. Example 3. You want to add new characters between the old characters. You want to change the block name CD1CON03 to CD15CON03. Select CD1CON03. Write 1 in the Replace field and write 15 in the With field. Example 4. You want to replace one character string in case there are several similar character strings in the block names. You want to change names CD2CON02 and MD2INP02 to CD3CON02 and MD3INP02. Select the original blocks. Because number 2 exists in two places, you have to write D2 in the Replace field and D3 in the With field. In other words, in this case it is not possible to define Replace = 2 and With = 3, because then also the latter number 2 will be replaced.
4.7.3
Changing (Rename) the block names for the data connections You can use the Rename function to rename one or several block names. Note! Block names must not contain question marks (?), because question mark is used as "wild card". Block names must not contain following URL characters either: +, /, ?, %, #, & and .(period).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 105
Property
Description
Departments
In the Departments combobox select the department, which contains the block names you want to rename. (The Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field shows the block defined for the selected department.).
Blocks of the selected department
Use the Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field to select the block(s), which name(s) you want to rename. To select several successive blocks, hold the Shift key down and click the first and last block names you want to select. To select some separate blocks, hold the Ctrl key down and click the names of blocks you want to select.
Task
Select Rename
New name
If you selected only one block to be renamed, the block name appears to the New name field. Overwrite the old name with the new name in the New name field. Click Change blocks to rename the block. The new name outputs to the New column in the right of the Blocks of the selected department field.
Change blocks
If you selected several blocks to be renamed, the name of the first block appears to the New name field. Now use the question mark (?) as a wild card for all those characters you want to keep unchanged. Example 1 (See the previous picture). You want to rename the character string 03 with the string 05 in the end of all the block names. Select all the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write CD1???05 in the New name field. The question marks indicate that you want to keep characters 4-6 unchanged. Click Change blocks. The new names of blocks output to the New column in the right of the Blocks of the selected department field. 8 - 106 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
The new names are updated to the Old column when you - reselect the department - open another tab and then the PMD Blocks tab again - close and open the Properties window. Example 2. You want to add character 1 to the end of the block names STCONT3A and STMEAS3B. Select the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write ????????1 in the New name field.
4.8
Details Tab The Details tab contains properties that are specific to each type of object. The following chapters describe Detail tab object by object.
4.8.1
Static Pushbutton The details Tab is used to define the push button's appearance. Use the Behaviors Tab and the tab(s) related to the selected behavior(s) to define the function for the button.
4.8.2
Property
Description
Label
The push button’s label.
Background Image
The graphic that forms the push button’s background.
Action:
Not used in the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. None = Nothing.
Hyperlink The details Tab is used to define the URL (e.g. Web page) or display, which appears when the clicks the Hyperlink push button in the interface (Station).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 107
4.8.3
Property
Description
Action:
None = no link. Callup Page = Link to a display. When activated in the interface the object output the display, which name and directory path you give in the field next to. Callup URL = URL link. When activated in the interface the object output e.g. the Web page, which name and directory path you give in the field next to.
Numerical Output
Property
Description
Display as
Specifies the value data type that is shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.) Default appearance is a 32 bit float.
Boolean Integer (16bit or 32bit) Float (32bit or 64bit)
8 - 108 • PMD Object Properties
Number of decimals
The number of decimals that is shown. Default is two decimals.
Exponential format
If checked specifies that the value is shown in exponential format.
True text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is true.
False text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is false.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.8.4
Numerical Entry
Property
Description
Display as
Specifies the value data type that is shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.) Default appearance is a 32 bit float.
Boolean Integer (16bit or 32bit) Float (32bit or 64bit)
4.8.5
Number of decimals
The number of decimals that is shown. Default is two decimals.
Exponential format
If checked specifies that the value is shown in exponential format.
True text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is true.
False text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is false.
Text Output
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 109
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Localization
Checked as default and has the following function: When the display, that contains this object, is opened in the interface (Station) for the first time, localization collects automatically all the data that can be localized and adds them to the localization database as text keys. After this the text keys can be translated in the database. Remove the selection, if you have no need to save data to the localization database.
4.8.6
Conditional Text Output
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
8 - 110 • PMD Object Properties
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Localization
Checked as default and has the following function: When the display, that contains this object, is opened in the interface (Station) for the first time, localization collects automatically all the data that can be localized and adds them to the localization database as text keys. After this the text keys can be translated in the database. Remove the selection, if you have no need to save data to the localization database.
4.8.7
Text Entry
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Localization
If checked the function is: Localization collects automatically texts that are entered to the system via this object and adds them to the localization database as text keys. After this the text keys can be translated in the database.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 111
4.8.8
Entry
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
4.8.9
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated.
Bar
Bar - value indicator is shown as a bar. Pointer - value indicator is shown as a pointer. Direction
8 - 112 • PMD Object Properties
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.8.10 PistonBar
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated. Bar - value indicator is shown as a bar. Pointer - value indicator is shown as a pointer.
Direction
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
4.8.11 Checkbox (FC data)
Property
Description
Label
The descriptive text that appears to the right of the checkbox.
Use inverse logic
Reverses the standard checkbox logic, so that it corresponds to the wording of Label. (In standard logic, checked equals "1".) For example, labeling a checkbox "Open" would require the opposite logic to labeling it "Close".
4.8.12 Insert ActiveX Document
Property
Description
File Name
The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the document that you want to display. If necessary, find the document by clicking the Browse button. See also 3.24 URL Formats.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 113
4.8.13 Insert Picture from File
Property
Description
Image file
If necessary, find the image file by clicking the Browse button.
4.8.14 Insert Shape from File
Property
Description
Shape file
If necessary, find the shape file by clicking the Browse button.
Display shape
Display element that is shown when the display, that contains this object, is called up in the interface (Station). This property is used only for Shape Sequences and the default selection is the first display shape.
4.8.15 Alphanumeric (FC data) Note! Alphanumeric (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar.
8 - 114 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Display as Details
These properties specify how the block.pin (point parameter) information is displayed. See the next table "Display As option / Description".
Number of characters displayed
The maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
Display As option
Description
Numeric
Displays the value as a number. If you deselect Floating decimal point, you must type the number of decimals you want to display in Number of decimals.
State descriptor
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable to a status point. Displays the state descriptor corresponding to the point’s status.
Text
Displays the value as text
Acronym
Not ed by the PMD system. Displays an acronym that corresponds to the (integer) value of the point parameter.
Time
Applicable if the value represents time. If the value is an integer, then it is assumed to represent minutes after midnight. If it is a real number, it is assumed to represent seconds after midnight. Specify the number of characters you want to display in Decimals.
Date
Applicable if the value is a date in Julian format.
Date/Time
Applicable if the value represents date and time.
Hexadecimal
Applicable if you want to display the value in hexadecimal format.
Source Address
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a source address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Destination Address
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a destination address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Parameter of given point
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a point number in a file. Select the parameter you want to display from the field opposite.
State descriptor of point at word
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a state descriptor of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Parameter name of point at word
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a parameter name of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 115
4.8.16 Indicator (FC data) Note! Indicator (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar.
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated. Bar - value indicator is shown as a bar. Pointer - value indicator is shown as a pointer.
Direction
4.9
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
Entry Tab The Entry Tab appears for the following objects: Numerical Entry, Text Entry, Entry, Binary Button and Signal Button. In addition the Entry Tab appears for an object in case if you first select the Toggle behavior in the Behaviors Tab and you then select the Acknowledge property in the Toggle Tab. That is to say, if you want to connect the Toggle behavior (send a signal status from source to destination) to an object so that the function must be acknowledged before the send.
8 - 116 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Description
Text is shown as advice for the data entry (Numerical Entry, Text Entry, Entry), when the entry dialog box is opened in the interface.
Description 2
Used only in case of Binary Button or Signal Button or Toggle behavior.
Description 3
Used only in case of Binary Button or Signal Button or Toggle behavior.
Data entry page name
Data entry dialog html page name. Defaults (that shouldn’t be changed without a special reason) are: Numerical Entry - AcknowledgeDE.htm Text Entry - AcknowledgeDE.htm Entry - AcknowledgePW.htm Binary Button - AcknowledgeToggle.htm Signal Button - AcknowledgeSB.htm Toggle behavior - AcknowledgeToggle.htm
4.10 Font Tab The font tab controls the appearance of the object’s text, such as the font and point size.
Property
Description
Font
Text is displayed in the selected font. Note! You should select fonts with care, and only use fonts that are suitable for computer displays.
Size
The text size, expressed in points.
Alignment
Left, right center and justify align the text within the object.
Effects
Bold and Italic apply these text styles to the text. Underline draws a line under the text (example). Strikeout draws a line through the text (example).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 117
4.11 General Tab The General tab controls the object’s basic properties as its position and size.
Property
Description
Name
The object’s name. You use this name when referring to the object in scripts.
ToolTip
The text that appears when someone hovers the mouse pointer over the object in the interface (Station).
Left Top Width Height
The object’s position and size, expressed in pixels.
Rotation
Angle specifies the clockwise angle through which the object is rotated. If Angle is grayed out, it indicates that the object cannot be rotated.
Visibility
The object’s visibility setting in Station. The values are: Hidden. The object is always hidden. Visible. The object is always visible. Inherit. The object’s visibility is determined by its parent. For example, if an object is part of a group, setting the visibility of the group will apply the same setting to the object. Tip! An invisible object can be used as a placeholder for a working value (such as the PV of a point), so that the value can be accessed by a script.
Style
The style applied to the object. The style is one of the styles defined in the style sheet attached to the display.
Enable tab stop
Allows s to select the object by pressing TAB. The integer number you type in Tab index field specifies the order in which objects are selected — tabbing starts with the lowest number and ends with the highest.
Tab index
8 - 118 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.12 Lines Tab The Lines tab controls the object’s line thickness and style.
Property
Description
Width
The width of the line. Options are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, tai 8 pixels
Style
The line’s style. For detailed descriptions of the style options see the separate table below this table.
Arrows
Only applicable for Static Line, Static Polyline and Static Bezier Curve objects, which have the line start and end. Begin style specifies the type of “arrow” at the start and End style specifies the type of “arrow” at the end.
Corners
Only available for the Rounded Rectangle object. Roundness (0-100) specifies the corners of the rectangle. 0 is a sharpcornered and 100 is a round-cornered rectangle.
Objects
Descriptions for line style options
Static Rectangle Static Rounded Rectangle Static Oval Static Line Static Polyline Static Bezier Curve Static Arc Static Wedge Static Textbox Filled Rectangle Filled Oval Filled Polygon
Selectable style options are:
Static Pushbutton Blinking Rectangle Numerical Output Numerical Entry Text Output Conditional Text Output Text Entry Entry Signal Controlled Text Bar PistonBar Mode General Logic Binary Button Signal Button Combobox (FC data)
Selectable style options are:
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
None - no border line Solid
Inset
Outset
Ridge
Groove
Dotted
Dashed
Double
Note, that some styles can be seen clearly only if you use some of the thicker line widths (4, 6 or 8 pixels).
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 119
4.13 Link Tab The Link Tab provides you to connect a display request to the object. The Link Tab only appears if the Display Link behavior is checked in the Behaviors Tab.
Property
Description
Display link name
The filename of the display that appears when a clicks on the object. The default folder is Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract.
4.14 Popup Tab This tab only appears if you select Popup on the Behaviors Tab.
Property
Description
File Name
The file name of the popup display that appears when a clicks on the object.
Initial Position
Determines the initial position of the popup when it is called up. Select Determine automatically if you want Station to determine the initial position near the object. Select Position on parent display if you want to specify the top-left corner coordinates of the popup. You can either type the Left and Top coordinates, or click Set Position and then click in the display to mark the position.
8 - 120 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.15 Signal Tab The Signal Tab only appears for the Signal Button object.
Property
Description
Signal interval between sendings (msecs)
Interval (milliseconds) after which the signal will be resend while the pulse activation button is depressed.
4.16 Task Tab The Task Tab is only applicable to the Numerical Entry, Text Entry and Entry objects. The Task Tab appears if you check the Task behavior on the Behaviors Tab of the object.
Property
Description
Invert
When unchecked, the source value (TaskSource property in the Data Tab) is set to destination (TaskDestination property in the Data Tab). When checked, you use the Invert Values fields to define the values to be sent to the destination.
Invert Values
If the source value (TaskSource property in the Data Tab) is 0 then the value in the field Invert Value 0 is set to the destination (TaskDestination property in the Data Tab). If the source value (TaskSource property in the Data Tab) is 1 then the value in the field Invert Value 1 is set to the destination (TaskDestination property in the Data Tab).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 121
4.17 Toggle Tab The Toggle behavior allows you to send signal status from the source to destination. The Toggle Tab appears only if you select the Toggle behavior on the Behaviors Tab of the object. You use the Toggle Tab to define the value to be sent to the destination and if the function must be acknowledged or not.
Property
Description
Acknowledge
If checked the value change must be acknowledged. Adds the Entry Tab, which you use to define the acknowledgement. Note! You must deselect the Acknowledge property (to remove the Entry Tab), before you deselect the Toggle behavior in the Behaviors tab.
Source and Destination
When the least significant bit of Source (SignalSource property in the PMD Data tab) is 0 then the value you define into the upper Destination field is set to the destination (SignalDestination property in the PMD Data tab). When the least significant bit of Source (SignalSource property in the PMD Data tab) is 1 then the value you define into the lower Destination field is set to the destination (SignalDestination property in the PMD Data tab).
4.18 Profile object Design Guide The purpose of this section is to instruct application designers how to create and modify Profile objects.
4.18.1 General Tab In the General Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Profile object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.11 General Tab.
4.18.2 PMD Data Tab In the PMD Data Tab there are both common and Profile object specific properties.
8 - 122 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Properties in the Parameters field are common to all objects. If you need instructions how to make a process data (block.pin) connection or what are the data types, see section 4.6 PMD Data Tab. In the following are descriptions for the Table object specific properties. Property
Description
Series_1 ValueArray1
The array that provides the process data values to the series 1 (curve 1)
ColorArray1
The array that provides the colors for the process data values of the series 1.
FirstIndex1
The number of values that belong to the series 1. Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values that belong to the series 1.
LastIndex1 FirstVisible1 LastVisible1 ScaleMinimum1 ScaleMaximum1
UpperAlarmLimit1 UpperWarningLimit1 LowerWarningLimit1 LowerAlarmLimit1
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The number of values that are shown by the series 1. Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values to be shown. The X-axis scale. Enter the desired minimum and maximum values. Use the Scale properties in the Series Tab to complete the definition of X-axis scale. Note! If you do not define the ScaleMinimum and ScaleMaximum properties, the X-axis scale is the scale of the series that has most values. Limits that observe values, which exceed or fall below a warning or alarm level. If the limits are connected, they are shown as horizontal lines over the profile object. The values exceeding or falling below limits are shown with separate colors. Note! Each series has its own limits.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 123
Property
Description
ComparisonLevel1
Use this property to define the level on which the Xaxis is drawn, if you are defining a series with twosided plot (the PlotMethod property is True). This property has no meaning, if you are defining a series with one-sided plot (the PlotMethod property is False).
PlotMethod1
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = two sided plot. False (or 0) = one-sided plot.
Series_2
See Series_1
Series_3
See Series_1
Series_4
See Series_1
Series_5
See Series_1
Series_6
See Series_1
General Direction
Drawing direction for all the series of the object. This property cannot be set independently for each series. True (or an integer not equal to 0) = the series are drawn from right to left. False (or 0) = the series are drawn from left to right.
4.18.3 PMD Blocks Tab In the PMD Blocks Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Profile object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.7 PMD Blocks Tab.
8 - 124 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.18.4 Series Tab On the series tab you can add, remove and customize series (Series 1 – Series 6) in a Profile object.
Property
Description
Add
Adds a new tab (Series 1 – Series 6), which you then use to define the type and other properties of the series. Note! You must define own tab for each of the series (Series_1 – Series_6) defined in the PMD Data Tab.
Remove
Removes a selected tab from the Series Tab.
Title
The title of the series. The titles of series are shown in the profile legend, if you select the option Series Names as the Legend Style property in the Legend Tab.
Type
Series type. The options are: Line – Color Array Area Bar -
Color
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Color of a series. This property has no effect, if you use the property Color Each (for Area and Bar types) or if you use the ColorArray property in the PMD Data Tab to define the colors of data points. PMD Object Properties • 8 - 125
Property
Description
Color Each
Only available for Area and Bar types. Colors each data point of the series with a different color. This property has no effect, if you use the ColorArray property in the Data Tab to define the colors of data points.
Border Visible
Visibility of borders in a series. Note! The Line type series disappears, if you uncheck this property.
Show in Legend
Shows a series information in the profile legend. Use the Legend Tab to define the information in detail.
Side Margins
Only available for Bar type. Side margins of a series within the back wall.
Stairs
Only available for Line and Area types. Shows the data as stairs.
Visible
Visibility of the series.
Multiple Series
Only available for Area and Bar types. Defines the mutual position of multiple series. None – Series are drawn one on the other on the Z-axis. Side - Data points of (Bar type) series are drawn next to each other’s on the X-axis. Stacked - Series are drawn one on the other on the Yaxis. Stacked 100% - Series are drawn one on the other on the Y-axis by using the total profile area.
Scale
The X-axis scale. (See also the ScaleMinimum and ScaleMaximum properties in PMD Data Tab.) Visible – when checked the X-axis scale is visible. Values format: - for example 0.0 = the values are shown with one decimal. Increment – for example 2 = every second value in the Xaxis scale are shown.
Bar Width
Only available for Bar type. Defines the width of bars.
4.18.5 Title Tab You use the Title Tab to define the name and its properties for a Profile object.
8 - 126 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Caption
Title of the profile.
Visible
When checked, the title is visible.
Alignment
Alignment of the title: The title can be placed to the Left, Center or Right on top of profile.
Background Color
Background color of the title: Transparent – Check this to override the background color and set it to transparent. Change - Uncheck Transparent and select the background color.
Font
Font of the title.
4.18.6 Legend Tab On the Legend Tab, you can customize the legend of the profile. The legend shows the titles of series, for example.
Property
Description
Visible
When checked, the legend is visible.
Alignment
Alignment of the legend. The legend can be placed to the Left, Right, Top or Bottom of the profile .
Font
Font of the text shown in the legend.
Background Color
Background color of the legend.
Legend Style
The data shown in the legend: Automatic Series Names Series Values Last Values
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 127
Property
Description
Text Style
The format of the text shown in the legend. This property has meaning only if Legend Style is Series Values or Last Values. The options are: Plain Left Value Right Value Left Percent Right Percent X Value
4.18.7 Tab You use the Tab to define the Profile object’s border and background properties.
8 - 128 • PMD Object Properties
Property
Description
Bevel Inner
Type of the inner bevel (frame): None, Lowered or Raised
Bevel Outer
Type of the outer bevel (frame): None, Lowered or Raised.
Width
Bevel – Width of the inner and outer bevel in pixels. Offset - Width of the space between the inner and outer bevel in pixels.
Gradient Direction
Direction from gradient start color to end color: Top Bottom, Bottom Top, Left Right, Right Left, From Center, From Top Left or From Bottom Left.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Margin (%)
Left margin between the profile and inner bevel. Right margin between the profile and inner bevel. Top margin between the profile and inner bevel. Bottom margin between the profile and inner bevel.
Gradient
The can be colored using two different colors. Visible – Sets the gradient color in use. Start Color - Gradient start color. End Color - Gradient end color. The use of Back property overrides the Gradient.
Background Image
Browse – Opens a dialog box, which you use to browse a background image for the profile. You can enter a file name with or without its path. If the whole path is not entered, the background image is searched for in the directory in which the display file is saved. The following picture formats are ed: bmp, jpg, jpeg, ico, wmf, and emf. If you set a background image it overrides the Gradient property.
4.18.8 Left Axis Tab / Bottom Axis Tab The following picture shows the meaning of properties available to customize the axes of a profile.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 129
Property
Description
Title
Caption – Title of the axis. Angle - The angle of the title. Can be set within the range of 0° to 360°. The default value is 0° for the bottom axis and 90° for the left axis. Font - Font of the axis title.
Labels
Visible - Sets the label visible. Font - Font of values shown in the label. Value Format – Format of values shown in the label. The default setting shows the values as integers. If you enter 0.0, the values are shown with one decimal, etc. If you leave the field empty no values are shown.
Grid Border
Visible - Sets the grid visible. Color – Color of the grid.
Grid Border Style
Style of the gridlines. Line type options are: Solid, Dash, Dot, Dash Dot, Dash Dot Dot or Small Dots.
Visible
Sets the axe visible.
4.18.9 Walls Tab You use the Walls Tab to customize the back wall color of the profile. The back wall is the area within which a series are drawn.
8 - 130 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Back Wall
Check the Transparent to leave the profile background transparent or uncheck the Transparent and click Color to select the desired color.
4.18.10 Selectors Tab You use the Selectors Tab to customize the left and right selectors of the profile. Selectors are the vertical indicator lines, which you can use to specify profile data.
Property
Description
Color
Left - Color of the left selector. Right - Color of the right selector.
Visible
Left - Sets the left selector visible. Right - Sets the right selector visible.
Width
Width of the selectors.
4.19 Table object Design Guide The purpose of this chapter is to instruct application designers how to create and modify Table objects.
4.19.1 General Tab In the General Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Table object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.11 General Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 131
4.19.2 PMD Data Tab In the PMD Data Tab there are both common and Table object specific properties.
Properties in the Parameters field are common to all objects. If you need instructions how to make a process data (block.pin) connection or what are the data types, see section 4.6 PMD Data Tab.
8 - 132 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the following are descriptions for the Table object specific properties and some definition examples. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Incoming data for the table.
Decimals
When valueformat is numerical, number of decimals.
Visibility
Data visibility vector. Index value = True (or an integer not equal to 0) => Corresponding data visible. Index value = False (or 0) => Corresponding data not visible.
RowCount (+)
Number of rows in the table.
ColCount (+)
Number of columns in the table.
Limits ValueUpperLimit ValueLowerLimit
Data entry upper and lower limits. Significant only if the property Lock values in this Spread is unchecked in the Settings Tab.
Appearance BackGColor
Table background color.
ForeColor
Table text color.
Headers ColumnHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?sarr?A?B?C?D?E?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between column headers.
RowHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?sarr?1?2?3?4?5?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between row headers.
Vector FirstElementIndex (+)
The first index of the data vector to be shown in the table. See examples below.
NumberOfElements (+)
Number of consecutive indexes shown. See examples below.
NumberOfModulo (+)
Number of consecutive indexes not shown. See examples below.
CharsFromVector
Number of characters shown in each index (string data type). See example below.
Note! The final values that a Table object outputs are defined by using the following vector properties in the PMD Data Tab: FirstElementIndex (+), NumberOfElements (+), NumberOfModulo (+) and CharsFromVector (+). In the following there are some examples how to define vector properties.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 133
Example 1. Showing all the vector elements in a table This example tells how to show all the values (1 to 10) of the vector. FirstElementIndex:
Define 1, because all the vector elements are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfElements: (Number of successive table indexes)
Define 1 or any other number > 0, because all the vector elements are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfModulo: (Number of those successive table indexes that are not shown in the table)
Define 0, because all the vector elements are to be shown in the table.
CharsFromVector: (Number of characters shown in each index in case the of string data type)
NA because the data type is Number. (see section 4.19.5 Value Format Tab).
In the PMD Data Tab the definitions are as follows:
When you set the number of rows (RowCount property) to 2 and the number of columns (ColCount property) to 5, the table shown in the following picture will be output in the display.
Example 2. Showing part of the vector elements in a table This example tells how to show only part of the vector's elements in a table. Vector has values from 1 to 20. In the HMIWeb Display Builder the designer sets following values:
8 - 134 • PMD Object Properties
FirstElementIndex:
Define 4, because the first element to be shown in the table exists in the vector index 4.
NumberOfElements: (Number of successive table indexes)
Define 2, because always two successive vector elements are to be shown in the table. (i.e. The two first vector indexes used are 4 and 5)
NumberOfModulo: (Number of those successive table indexes that are not shown in the table)
Define 3, because always three successive vector elements after the used elements are left unread. (i.e. The indexes 6, 7 and 8 are not used, indexes 9 and 10 are used, indexes 11, 12 and 13 are not used, etc.)
CharsFromVector: (Number of characters shown in each index in case the of string data type)
NA because the data type is Number. (see section 4.19.5 Value Format Tab).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the PMD Data Tab the definitions are as follows:
When you set the number of rows (RowCount property) to 1 and the number of columns (ColCount property) to 8, the table shown in the following picture will be output in the display.
Example 3. Showing text in a table This example instructs how to show texts (data type is String) in a table. Basic idea is the same than with numerical values, but now the designer has to define also the CharsFromVec property and the format of incoming text is a long string (while the format for numerical values is an array). i.e. one character in a string can be corresponds to one value in a numerical array. In this example the original text is a 16 characters long string. In the HMIWeb Display Builder the designer sets following values: FirstElementIndex:
Define 1, because all the characters of the string are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfElements: (Number of successive table indexes)
Define 1 or any other number > 0, because all the characters of the string are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfModulo: (Number of those successive table indexes that are not shown in the table)
Define 0, because all the characters of the string are to be shown in the table.
CharsFromVector: (Number of characters shown in each index in case the of string data type)
Define 2, because two characters are to be shown in each table cell.
In the PMD Data Tab the definitions are as follows:
When you set the number of rows (RowCount property) to 1 and the number of columns (ColCount property) to 8, the table shown in the following picture will be output in the display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 135
4.19.3 PMD Blocks Tab In the PMD Blocks Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Table object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.7 PMD Blocks Tab.
4.19.4 Font Tab In the Font Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Table object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.10 Font Tab.
4.19.5 Value Format Tab The Value Format Tab is used to define the data type in the table.
8 - 136 • PMD Object Properties
Property
Description
Number
This option allows you to show numerical type data in the table. You can also show data exponentially by selection the Show number exponentially property.
String
This option allows you to show string type data in the table.
Boolean
This option allows you to define the texts to be shown in the table when the boolean data type is true and false.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.19.6 Appearance Tab The Appearance Tab is used to define some details of appearance (layout).
Property
Description
Alignment
Use the Alignment taken from value format or align the values in the table cells to the Left, Center or Right.
Borders
Check the Show grid on table to get the grid visible. Uncheck to hide grid.
4.19.7 ColRow Tab The Columns/Rows (ColRow) Tab is used to define whether the headers are shown or not. If headers are shown, sizes of headers are defined here.
Property
Description
Headers
Select Show column headers, to get column headers visible. Uncheck to hide column headers. Use the ColumnHeaderText property in the PMD Data Tab to define the header texts. Select Show row headers, to get row headers visible. Uncheck to hide row headers. Use the RowHeaderText property in the PMD Data Tab to define the header texts.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 137
Property
Description
Header sizes
Set the Height of column headers and Width of row headers in pixels. These properties are significant only if you select the Show column headers and Show row headers properties in this same tab.
4.19.8 Settings Tab The Settings Tab is used to define some settings for table.
Property
Description
Lock values in this Spread
Check to prevent the data entry to the table cells.
Localization
Check Localize locked output strings to localize texts in cells of string data type. Check Localize headers if there is need to localize header texts. Check Localize True/False texts to localize texts shown in the table when the boolean data type is true and false.
Note! Table needs to be locked (data entry prevented) for localization to work.
Direction for setting the values to Spread.
Check the One row at the time to define that incoming data is set to table one row at the time, starting from first row. Defines also cursor to move horizontally from left to right. Check the One column at the time to define that incoming data is set to table one column at the time, starting from first column. Defines also cursor to move from top to bottom.
8 - 138 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5
EPKS Object Properties
5.1
EPKS Object Properties – overview You access the properties of the selected object(s) through the Properties window. You can call up the Properties window for an object
5.2
•
by double-clicking the object.
•
by clicking the (Properties window) on the View toolbar. Note! Make sure the correct object is selected.
•
by right-clicking the object and selecting Edit Properties from the menu opened.
Animation Tab The animation tab specifies the correspondence between the object’s color and the value or status of the associated point parameter/database file. Property
Description
Color Breakpoints
The type of animation used for the object:
Indicate alarm state with color
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
•
None. No animation.
•
Continuous. The color changes as the value changes. You can specify up to nine colors and the percentage range for which each color applies. (For example, you could make an object turn red when the value is between 90 and 100 percent of its range.)
•
Discrete. Each color represents a particular discrete value. Select Inverse if you want to use the object's fill color — this produces a "reverse video" effect, which makes text stand out, providing you have selected an appropriate color scheme.
Station overrides the current color with the systemdefined colors during alarm states. (See the following table.)
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 139
Property
Description
Indicate off-scan state with color
Station overrides the current color with the systemdefined color for “off-scan”. (See the following table.)
Level fill animation
Only applicable to vector objects, such as ovals. The "level" of the object's fill color varies in accordance with a value in the database. Adds the Data Tab, which you use to specify the database details.
System Defined Colors
5.3
Point state
System defined color
In alarm and unacknowledged
Red and blinking
In alarm and acknowledged
Red
Returned to normal but alarm not acknowledged
Normal color, but blinking
Point off-scan (scanning disabled)
White
Behaviors Tab The Behaviors tab specifies which behaviors are attached to the object. When you select a behavior from the Behaviors tab, another tabs appear, which you then use to configure the behavior’s properties. For example, if you select Popup behavior, the Popup tab appears. The behavior list indicates which behaviors are available for the object. Description provides a brief description of the behavior. The following table describes the behaviors supplied with HMIWeb Display Builder. However, some other behaviors may also be supplied for specialized tasks and all these behaviors are not available for all the objects.
8 - 140 • EPKS Object Properties
Behavior
Description
Faceplate
A faceplate appears when a clicks the object. A faceplate is a specialized type of popup that shows critical information about the point. (In most cases, a faceplate looks like the lefthand portion of the associated point detail display.)
Hover
Only applicable to alphanumerics and comboboxes. If the object is too narrow to show its contents, the contents appears in a ToolTip (a small window) when a moves the mouse pointer over the object. Note: If you select this behavior, do not use the object's ToolTip property (General tab).
Popup
When selected this option allows the to call up a popup by clicking the object in Station. Adds the Popup Tab, which you use to configure the popup. For an introduction to popups, see 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate.
Shape Sequence Animation
Only applicable to shape sequences. See 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To define a behavior: 1. Select the object and click the Behaviors tab. 2. Select the behavior you want to define. 3. If any new tabs appear, select them and define the behavior’s properties. See instructions for the tab in question.
5.4
Colors Tab The Colors tab controls the object's colors. The number of color properties depends on the object's type. For example, a rectangle has line and fill colors, whereas an alphanumeric also has a text color. (The following table only describes the common properties.) Property
Description
Fill Color
The object's fill color.
Line Color
The object's line color.
Text Color
The text color. Only applicable to objects with text, such as alphanumerics and pushbuttons.
Level Fill Color
The color of the bar or pointer used to indicate the value. Only applicable to indicator objects.
Chart object specific properties
5.5
Property
Description
axisBackColor
The background color of the axes.
AxisLabelColor
The color of the axis labels.
AxisMarkerLabelColor
The color of the axis markers.
plotBackColor
The background color of the plot.
referenceLineColor
The color of the reference line.
Custom Properties Tab The Custom Properties Tab is only applicable to a dynamic shape that has been inserted into a display. For details about:
5.6
•
Custom properties, see 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
•
Filling in this tab, see 2.5.4 Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display.
Data Tab The Data tab specifies the object's link to the database. (For some types of objects, such as rectangles and circles, this tab only appears if you select Color Animation on the Behaviors Tab. The Type of database link property specifies the type of link: •
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Point/Parameter. The object is linked to a point parameter. See 5.6.1 Defining a Link To a Point. EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 141
•
5.6.1
Database file. The object is linked to a file in the server database, whose contents are controlled by another application. See 5.6.2 Defining a Link to a Database File.
Defining a Link To a Point Note! This function is not ed by the Experion PKS with PMD Control system. When defining a link to a point, you specify the point and the appropriate parameter. (Each point has a number of parameters associated with it, such as field values and configuration details. For details about points and their parameters, see the Server and Client Configuration Guide.) Property
Description
Point
The ID of the point to which the object is linked. If you are creating the display on a server, you can select the ID from the list. (However, in a DSA system, the server you are working on may not know of the existence of every point in the system.)
Parameter
The point parameter to which the object is linked. If you select a history parameter, such as H24H, History offset controls which history value is used. (0, the default, represents the latest history value, 1 represents the second-to-last value, and so on.)
Data entry allowed
If you select Data entry allowed, s with a security level equal to or higher than the specified Security Level can edit the object's value. The security levels are: Operator, Supervisor, Engineer and Manager.
Security level
5.6.2
Defining a Link to a Database File Note! This function is not ed by the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. For details about database files, see the Application Development Guide.
8 - 142 • EPKS Object Properties
Property
Description
File
The number of the file to which the object is linked. Select the indexing option from the list opposite: •
No indexing.
•
Indexed by file offset. Adds Station’s current file offset to the file number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the host and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Record
The number of the record within the file. Select the indexing option from the list opposite:
Word
No indexing.
•
Indexed by record offset. Adds Station’s current record offset to the record number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the server and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
•
Indexed by field offset. Adds Station’s current field offset to the word number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the server and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
•
Indexed by Station no. Each Station uses separate records in the file. The effect is to view the file as a series of logical files, one for each Station. Set the record and word numbers as normal; for example, if you want the link to refer to the second record for each Station, set Record to 2.
The word number within the file. Select the indexing option from the list opposite: •
No indexing.
•
Indexed by field offset. Adds Station’s current field offset to the word number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the server and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
Format
The data format. If you select String, you must specify the length of the string. If you select Bits, you must specify the starting bit and the number of bits within the word.
Read from oldest record of circular file
Applicable if it is a circular file and you want to read the oldest record first.
Data entry allowed
If you select Data entry allowed, s with a security level equal to or higher than the specified Security Level can edit the object's value. The security levels are: Operator, Supervisor, Engineer and Manager.
Security level
5.7
•
Data Tab (Alarm table) The Data tab controls what columns (alarm details) appear in the alarm table. Property
Description
Tick the columns you wish to show
Lists the available columns that can appear in the alarm table. Select the columns you want to appear in the table. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to specify the order in which columns appear in the table. (The first column in the list appears on the left of the table.)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 143
Property
Description
Width
The width of the selected column. The way in which the width is interpreted depends on the setting for Column resizing (on the Details tab). If you set Column resizing to None or Standard, the width represents pixels. Note that if the sum of the column widths is greater than the width of the alarm table (Width on the General tab), you should enable horizontal scrollbars (set Horizontal scrollbar on the Details tab to visible). If you set Column resizing to Compact, the width is treated as proportional value, and the column widths are automatically adjusted to fit the table. For example, if a table is 450 pixels wide and you set the width of the first column to 100 and the width of the four other columns to 200, the width of the first column will be 50 pixels (one ninth of 450) and the width of each other column will be 100 pixels (2/9 of 450).
5.8
Details Tab The Details tab contains properties that are specific to each type of object.
5.8.1
5.8.2
ActiveX Document Property
Description
File Name
The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the document that you want to display. If necessary, find the document by clicking the Browse button. See also 3.24 URL Formats.
Property
Description
Alarm table Header Header height Visible
If Visible is selected, the table includes column headings. Header height specifies the height (in pixels) of the column headings.
Grid Row height
The height (in pixels) of the rows.
Scrollbars
8 - 144 • EPKS Object Properties
Vertical scrollbar
The vertical scrollbar's visibility setting. The values are: Hidden = the scrollbar is hidden Visible = the scrollbar is visible Auto = the scrollbar only appears if the table cannot simultaneously show all the alarms.
Horizontal scrollbar
The horizontal scrollbar's visibility setting. The values are: Hidden = the scrollbar is hidden Visible = the scrollbar is visible Auto = the scrollbar only appears if the table is narrower than total width of the columns.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Resizing
5.8.3
Column resizing
Specifies whether a can resize columns, and the way in which adjacent columns are resized: None = The columns cannot be resized Standard = Resizing a column makes the column to the right wider/narrower Compact = Resizing a column makes all columns to the right proportionally wider/narrower.
Date and time format
Specifies the date and time format. The formats are: Date and time = shows the date, and time to seconds Date and time (ms) = shows the date, and time to ms (If you don't want ms resolution, specify 1 or 2 decimal places.) Time = shows the time to seconds Time (ms) = shows the time to ms (If you don't want ms resolution, specify 1 or 2 decimal places.)
Alphanumeric Property
Description
Display as Details
These properties specify how the value is displayed. See the next table "Display As option / Description".
Word wrap
If selected, the value (normally text) is displayed over several lines if it is longer than the alphanumeric's width.
Number of characters displayed
The maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
Display As option
Description
Numeric
Displays the value as a number. If you deselect Floating decimal point, you must type the number of decimals you want to display in Number of decimals.
State Descriptor
Applicable to a status point. Displays the state descriptor associated with the current value.
Text
Applicable if the value is a text string.
Acronym
Displays the acronym associated with the current value (an integer) of the point parameter. See 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms.
Time
Applicable if the value represents time. If the value is an integer, then it is assumed to represent minutes after midnight. If it is a real number, it is assumed to represent seconds after midnight. Specify the number of characters you want to display in Decimals.
Date
Applicable if the value is a date in Julian format.
Date/Time
Applicable if the value date and time.
Hexadecimal
Applicable if you want to display the value in hexadecimal format.
Source Address
Applicable if the value is a source address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Destination Address
Applicable if the value is a destination address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 145
5.8.4
Display As option
Description
Parameter of given point
Applicable if the value is a point number in a file. Select the parameter you want to display from the field opposite.
State descriptor of point at word
Applicable if the value is a state descriptor of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Parameter name of point at word
Applicable if the value is a parameter name of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Chart You can simultaneously display the values of up to eight point parameters, depending on the type of chart selected in Chart type on the Options Tab. (Currently, the chart only s Line Trend, which allows you to have up to eight plots.)
5.8.5
5.8.6
Property
Description
Plot
The plot's ID. (Used in scripts to identify the plot.)
Point ID Parameter
The point parameter whose values you want to display.
Color
The color used to display the point parameter values on the chart.
Property
Description
Label
The descriptive text that appears to the right of the checkbox.
Use inverse logic
Reverses the standard checkbox logic, so that it corresponds to the wording of Label. (In standard logic, checked equals "1".) For example, labeling a checkbox "Open" would require the opposite logic to labeling it "Close".
Checkbox
Combobox
8 - 146 • EPKS Object Properties
Property
Description
Display as Details
Specifies how the object is animated. See the next table "Display As option/Description".
Sort alphabetically
Alphabetically sorts the items in the list.
Display As option
Description
State Descriptor
Displays the defined states of the selected point as entries in the combobox’s list.
Acronym
Displays an acronym that corresponds to the (integer) value of the point parameter. See 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.8.7
5.8.8
5.8.9
Display As option
Description
Parameter name of point at word
Only applicable if the value is a parameter name of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Hyperlink Property
Description
Action
Calls up the specified object: Callup URL. Calls up the specified URL. Callup Page. Calls up the specified display (DSP or HMIWeb). Note that you do not have to specify the path because Station automatically searches its display folders. None. Does nothing.
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated. Bar - A colored bar of variable height within the object indicates the relative value. Pointer - A colored pointer moves up and down within the object to indicate the relative value.
Direction
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
Property
Description
Label
The push button’s label.
Background Image
The graphic that forms the push button’s background.
Action, Details
The action performed when a clicks the push button. See the next table "Select this action/To do this".
Select this action:
To do this:
None
Nothing, or the button has a script that runs when it is clicked by a .
Callup Page
Call up the specified display or Web page. If you specify a Web page, you must ensure that it does not conflict with the Web access restrictions specified in Station.
Request Report
Request the specified report.
Indicator
Push button
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 147
Select this action:
To do this:
Request Task
Perform the task associated with the specified task LRN. In addition to specifying a task LRN, you must also specify: •
Appropriate values for the task parameters
•
The security level required to perform the task
For details about the Server Display Program (LRN 21), see Server and Client Configuration Guide. Menu Tag
Perform the menu command selected from the list of menu commands.
Launch Application
Launch the specified application. Either type the application’s name in Application, or click the button opposite to navigate through the folder structure and find the executable.
5.8.10 Shape Applicable to both shape sequences and dynamic shapes, whether embedded or linked.
5.9
Property
Description
Shape file
The shape file on which this shape is based. Readonly.
Display shape
Only applicable to a shape sequence. The shape that is initially displayed when the display is called up. By default, this is the first shape in the sequence.
Filters Tab The Filters tab is only applicable to alarm and event tables, and specifies what types of alarms/events appear in the table. Property
Description
Tick the columns you wish to filter by
Lists the alarm/event details (columns).
Filter
The properties that appear in this section depend on the currently selected column (alarm/event item). Configure the properties as appropriate. For example, if you only wanted to include unacknowledged alarms in the table, you would select the Alarm State Indication column, and then select Unacknowledged here. Note: You can filter by a column even if it does not appear in the table. (The Data tab specifies which columns are visible.) For example, you may want to filter out low and high priority alarms even though the Priority column is not visible.
8 - 148 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.10 Font Tab The font tab controls the appearance of the object's text, such as the font and point size. Property
Description
Font
Text is displayed in the selected font. Note that you should select fonts with care, and only use fonts that are suitable for computer displays.
Size
The text size, expressed in points. (If you want to specify a non-standard size, click the box and type the size — for example: 56.5pt — and then press ENTER.)
Style
The text style, such as italics.
Justify
The horizontal alignment of text within the object.
Effects
Strikeout draws a line through the text and Underline draws a line under it.
5.11 General Tab The General tab controls the object's basic properties such as its position and size. Property
Description
Name
The object’s name. You use this name when referring to the object in scripts.
ToolTip
The text that appears when someone hovers the mouse pointer over the object in Station.
Left Top Width Height
The object’s position and size, expressed in pixels.
Rotation
Angle specifies the clockwise angle through which the object is rotated. If Angle is grayed out, it indicates that the object cannot be rotated.
Visibility
The object’s visibility setting in Station. The values are: •
Hidden. The object is always hidden.
•
Visible. The object is always visible.
•
Inherit. The object’s visibility is determined by its parent. For example, if an object is part of a group, setting the visibility of the group will apply the same setting to the object.
Tip! An invisible object can be used as a placeholder for a working value (such as the PV of a point), so that the value can be accessed by a script. Enable tab stop Tab index
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Allows s to select the object by pressing TAB. The integer number you type in Tab index field specifies the order in which objects are selected — tabbing starts with the lowest number and ends with the highest.
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 149
5.12 Lines Tab The Lines tab controls the object's line thickness and style. Property
Description
Width
The width of the line.
Style
The line’s style, such as dotted or dashed.
Arrows
Only applicable if the line has a start and an end. Specifies the type of “arrow” at the start and end of the line.
5.13 Options Tab The Options tab is only applicable to a chart object, and controls its major characteristics, such as its type (line, pie, etc.) and the rate at which it plots new values. Property
Description
Chart type
The type of chart. Currently, only Line Trend is ed. A line trend can have up to eight plots, each of which plots the values of a separate point parameter.
Axis
Specifies the colors used for the legend text and its background.
History type
The type of history, for example: 6 minute average.
Samples
The number of samples you want to display, up to 1000. Note that the larger the number of samples, the heavier the load on the server and the longer the time required to update the chart.
Units
Specifies whether samples are displayed as percentage values or as engineering units.
5.14 Popup Tab This tab only appears if you select Popup on the Behaviors Tab. Property
Description
File Name of Page to be displayed in Popup Window
The filename of the popup display that appears when a clicks the object.
Initial Position
Determines the initial position of the popup when it is called up. Select Position on parent display if you want to specify the coordinates of the top-left corner of the popup. You can either type the Left and Top coordinates, or click Set Position and then click in the display to mark the position. Select Determine automatically if you want Station to determine the initial position.
8 - 150 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.15 Acronyms Note! This function is not ed by the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. An acronym describes the meaning of a parameter's state (or integer value). For example, the acronyms "Stopped" and "Running" are much more meaningful in displays than the raw parameter values "0" and "1". The default acronym file contains acronyms suitable for most purposes. Acronyms in this file are divided into two ranges: •
System. Pre-defined, which include commonly required acronyms. System acronyms are stored in records 1 to 2048.
•
-defined. Stored in records 2881 to 3880. You define acronyms in Station.
Related acronyms are stored as contiguous records in the order that corresponds to the states of a parameter. The following example shows how the four states of a parameter correspond to a set of four acronyms — Stopped to Fast. (When selecting a set of acronyms, you specify the record of the first acronym and the number of acronyms required — see 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms.
Custom Acronyms You can create custom acronym files — the main advantage is that custom acronyms can be more than 10 characters long. For details about creating custom acronyms, see Using Custom Acronyms in the Display Building Guide.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 151
5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms Related acronyms are stored as contiguous records in the order corresponding to the parameter values. To select a set of acronyms, you specify the record of the first acronym, as well as the number of acronyms required. To select default acronyms: 1. Select Acronym in Display as and file in Source. 2. Specify the values of the other properties as appropriate. Property
Description
Start the acronym
The record that contains the first acronym.
Number of acronyms
The number of acronyms you want to use.
Preview
If you are on the server, the selected acronyms appear in this box.
To select custom acronyms: 1.
Select Acronym in Display as and file in Source.
2.
Specify the values of the other properties as appropriate.
Property
Description
File
The file that contains the custom acronyms.
Start at record
The record that contains the first acronym.
Number of acronyms
The number of acronyms you want to use.
Start at word
The word that contains the first acronym.
Length of acronyms
The length of the acronyms.
Location
Specifies how the acronyms are stored within the file:
Preview
•
Consecutive records
•
Single record, where the acronyms are stored in consecutive words within the same record.
If you are on the server, the selected acronyms appear in this box.
5.16 Sorting tab The Sorting tab is only applicable to alarm and event tables and the table object. It specifies how alarms/events are sorted. To learn about alarm and event tables, see 5.18 About alarm and event tables.
8 - 152 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Sort by this column
These properties specify up to three levels of sorting instructions for alarms/events that appear in the table. For example, you might want to sort alarms by Priority (select Descending to list the highest priority alarms first) and then by Date & Time (select Descending to list the newest alarm first).
Then by
At each level, select a column (alarm/event item) and the order in which alarms/events are sorted. Note: You can sort by a column even if it does not appear in the table. (The Data tab specifies which columns are visible.) For example, you may want the most recent alarm to appear at the top of the table even though the Alarm Time column is not visible.
5.17 About vector graphic objects Vector graphic objects are "line-based" objects such as rectangles and curves. The following objects are vector graphic objects. Arc
Polygon
Rounded Rectangle
Bezier Curve
PolyLine
Textbox
Line
Rectangle
Wedge
Oval The following table lists specialized editing tasks you can perform on vector graphic objects. Task: 3.3.2 Creating a new object from overlapping objects. 3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance. 3.16 Using the Node Editor.
5.18 About alarm and event tables An alarm table lists alarms in a manner similar to the Alarm Summary. An event table lists events in a manner similar to the Event Summary. The properties you can specify when creating an alarm or event table include: •
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The types of alarms/events that are shown (For example, you may only want to show urgent alarms for a particular area.) EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 153
•
The details that are shown (date/time, description, priority and so on), and the order in which they appear across the table
•
Whether there are horizontal and vertical scrollbars
Typical alarm table
Note: •
Unlike an alarm table, an event table does not show events as soon as they occur (subject to the display's refresh rate). Instead, it shows events stored in the SQL events database, which is updated from the "live" system database at 30second intervals. This means that the most recent event in an event table will be at least 30 seconds old.
•
By default, the event table has its event time filter set to "TODAY", which means only those events that are generated on the same day are displayed. The "TODAY" event time filter shows events stored in the SQL events database, which is updated from the "live" system database at 30-second intervals.
•
When you create an alarm or event table in HMIWeb Display Builder, its appearance does not closely reflect its appearance in Station. For example, there is only one "column" regardless of how many columns you actually specify.
Typical alarm or event table as it appears in HMIWeb Display Builder
5.19 About trends A trend object presents information in a graphical manner, and can be configured in numerous ways. Notes: Some of the features described here can only be accessed using scripts. The Properties Window only allows you to configure a chart's basic properties. Currently, you can only create line and bar trends in HMIWeb Display Builder. If you want to create another type of chart, such as pie or tuning, you must use Display Builder. 8 - 154 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
A trend includes the following main components: •
Chart area. The data display area.
•
Axis. The rulers and legends of the x/y axes.
•
Toolbar. The toolbar above the chart area.
•
Legend. The tabular area below the chart area.
5.19.1 Chart area A trend can display up to 32 plots, each of which can be separately configured. You can also configure the view's appearance such as the background and grid colors.
Samples and sample intervals For the x-axis, the minimum sample interval is 1 second. (The maximum sample interval is 24 hours.)
Plot ToolTips When a moves the pointer over a plot, a ToolTip shows the value of the plot at that point, as shown in the following figures. With scripting, you can include a suitable prefix to the value, as shown in the figure on the right.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 155
Reference line and reference values When a clicks in the Plot View a vertical reference line appears. The placement of the reference line depends on whether snap to value is set. If snap to value is set, the reference line is placed to nearest value. If snap to value is not set, the reference line es through the point marked by the click. Also, when the moves the pointer over the reference line, a ToolTip appears which shows its date/time. With scripting, you use the OnReferenceCursorSet to obtain the reference values. A reference value is the value (and date/time) of a plot where it intersects the reference line. (The value is calculated using linear interpolation between the two adjacent samples.) If the Legend is visible, the reference values are shown in the Legend grid.
Event bar and data tips If the Event Summary is visible with the trend, an event bar is added to the bottom of the chart area. The event bar contains icons to indicate when an event occurred. A data tip appears when a clicks on an event symbol. To remove the data tip a clicks on the event symbol again. If a different symbol is clicked, the data tip displayed is for the new event symbol. Only one data tip can be visible at a time. If multiple events occurred in the region of the event symbol then arrow buttons appear in the data tip. These arrow buttons allow s to scroll through the events that occurred at that time.
Zoom function A can zoom into a particular part of the trend by dragging diagonally across the area of interest, as shown in the following figure. When the releases the mouse button, the trend zooms into the rectangle marked by the pointer. 8 - 156 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The returns the trend to its normal scale by clicking the button.
Invalid data If the trend receives invalid data, it discontinues the plot until valid data is again received, as shown in the following figure.
5.19.2 Axis By default, the Axis View includes the axis marker labels. With scripting, you can also include axis labels.
Labels with multiple plots Each plot on a trend can have its own axis and marker labels (as well as other properties such as range and number of samples). However, only the labels for the first plot in a trend are displayed. The ranges of the other plots are automatically scaled to fit the y-axis. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 157
5.19.3 Toolbar A trend can include toolbars so that s can manipulate the trend. With the toolbar, s can: •
Change the scale
•
Change the line plot to a bar graph for a single point
•
Show or hide the Event Summary
•
Show or hide the Legend
•
Show or hide numeric history
•
Zoom
•
Change the time period
With scripting, you use the SetXAxisToolbarItemVisible method to specify what items are available on the toolbar.
5.19.4 Legend The Legend provides more detailed information about the points that are included in the trend. The legend can be provided in two forms, a full legend or a mini legend. The mini legend contains the pen check box, point ID, and parameter. In addition to these items, the full legend also contains the point description, low scale, high scale, current value, reference value and engineering units. If the toolbar is visible on the trend, s have the option to show or hide the legend. If the trend also includes events or includes numeric history, then only the mini legend can be included.
8 - 158 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
6
Display Properties
6.1
Display Properties – overview You access the properties of the current display (Display, Popup, Dynamic Shape or Shape Sequence) through the Properties window. You can call up the Properties window
6.2
•
by double-clicking the plain display area.
•
by clicking the Properties window button on the View toolbar. Note! If any object is selected, select Edit / Deselect All to get the Properties window for the display.
•
by right-clicking the plain display area and selecting Edit Properties from the menu opened.
Appearance Tab The Appearance tab contains properties that define the background details and size of the display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 159
Property
Description
Background
Image / Browse – Opens a dialog box which you use to browse a background image for the display. You can enter a file name with or without its path. If the whole path is not entered, the background image is searched for in the directory in which the display file is saved. The following picture formats are ed: bmp, jpg, jpeg, ico, wmf, and emf. If you set a background image it overrides the background color. Color of the display background. Style - A style from the style sheet specified in Stylesheet
6.3
Size
The Width and Height of the display, expressed in pixels.
Style
Stylesheet - The style sheet used by the display.
Callup Task Tab
The Callup Task tab specifies the task that is performed whenever the display is called up. A task is any of the standard server programs or an application program. If you want to perform the task at regular intervals while the display is visible, use the Periodic Task Tab. Property
Description
Request task on page callup
Select this checkbox to specify a callup task.
Details
The task details, including its LRN (task identifier), parameters and the security level required to perform the task. If you select Add station number offset to LRN, a separate task is performed on each Station. (The number of the task performed on a particular station is equal to the sum of the specified LRN and the Station’s number.)
8 - 160 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
6.4
Custom Properties Tab
This Custom Properties Tab is only applicable to a dynamic shape (a display, which type is Dynamic Shape). You use this tab to define a dynamic shape's custom properties. For a description of custom properties and for details how to use this tab, see 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
6.5
Details Tab
Property
Description
Display Refresh rate {seconds}
By default, Station updates all displays at a standard rate, typically once every five seconds. This option allows you to specify a slower rate for the display. (If the display is particularly complex, slowing the refresh rate will reduce the load on your system.)
Zooming allowed
If this check box is cleared, operators cannot zoom in/out on the display
Multi window
SafeView window category Single use application set Application set name
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 161
Property
Description
Allow display callup for
Only applicable if areas have been defined for your system. Specifies which areas can call up the display. All areas - The default selection, which does not restrict access to the display. Only area - Restricts access to the specified area. Area defined by File / Word - Restricts access to the area specified by the file/word combination. (In general, these fields are used only by Honeywell personnel.)
6.6
6.7
General Tab
Property
Description
Title
The display's title that appears in the Station Title Bar (and in the Display Summary page if it is a numbered display) Or the title of a popup, shape sequence or dynamic shape.
Description
Any notes or comments about a display, popup, shape sequence or dynamic shape.
Use first shape for bad value
Only applicable to a shape sequence. If selected, Station displays the first shape if the associated point no longer exists.
Help Tab The Help tab specifies the help associated with the display. Station s can call up the help by pressing the help key or selecting a menu item. (Each Station must be configured so that s can access the help. For details, see Server and Client Configuration Guide.) You can specify either:
6.7.1
•
A topic within a HTML Help file. HTML files have a “chm” extension — see 6.7.1 Specifying a Topic in a HTML Help File.
•
A document such as a HTML file or Microsoft Word document — see 6.7.2 Specifying Help Other Than HTML Help.
Specifying a Topic in a HTML Help File You specify a topic within a HTML Help file using either its topic number or its internal filename.
8 - 162 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
You can create HTML Help using a variety of help authoring tools, including Microsoft HTML Help Workshop, which you can from Microsoft’s Web site.
6.7.2
Property
Description
Help file name
The HTML Help filename, including its chm extension. If the file is not in one of Station’s display folders, you must include the full pathname.
Help file type
Automatically set to HTML Help when you specify the chm extension.
Help Topic Note! This property is not ed by the PMD system.
The help topic, which can be specified using either its: •
Internal filename. Set Locate topic by to Topic file and specify the filename of the topic in Topic file.
•
Number. Set Locate topic by to Topic number and specify the number in Topic number.
Specifying Help Other Than HTML Help You specify help, other than HTML Help by typing its filename. (Typical help documents include HTML pages and Word documents.)
Property
Description
Help file name
The filename of the document, including its extension. If the file is not in one of Station’s display folders, you must include the full pathname.
Help file type
6.8
Automatically set to Ordinary document if its extension is not chm.
Keys Tab You can assign a range of common commands to the PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN keys, as well as the softkeys. A softkey is a function key whose action is defined for each page rather than being fixed for the Station.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 163
6.9
Property
Description
Key
A key and the associated action it performs when pressed.
Action
To assign an action to a key, select the key from the list and then the action. Repeat for each key as required.
Periodic Task Tab The Periodic Task tab specifies the task that is performed at regular intervals while the display is visible. (A task is any of the standard server programs or an application program.) If you only want to perform the task when the display is called up, use the Callup Task Tab. For details about the Server Display Program (also known as "LRN 21"), see the Server and Client Configuration Guide. For details about application programs, see the Application Development Guide.
8 - 164 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Request task periodically
Select this checkbox to specify a periodic task.
Details
The task details, including its LRN (task identifier), parameters and the security level required to perform the ask. If you select Add station number offset to LRN, a separate ask is performed on each Station. (The number of the task performed on a particular station is equal to the sum of the pacified LRN and the Station’s number.)
Request every
The request interval, specified in display update intervals. (By default, Station updates all displays at the same rate, typically every five seconds. However, you can specify a longer interval in Refresh rate on the General tab.)
6.10 PMD Blocks
For instructions see section 4.7 PMD Blocks Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 165
6.11 PMD General Note! The PMD General Tab appears in the Display Properties window after you have configured one or more PMD objects for the display.
Note! When you select the Rename function in the Task field, the New name field appears instead of the Replace and With fields. Property
Description
Page name
The automatically formed display / popup specific name.
Department
Shows the name of the PMD department being configured.
Process Area
The process area for the display.
Protection
The protection level for the display.
Display reference
Lists the display references.
Task
Replace: Replace all occurrences of characters given in Replace field with characters in With field in the selected names. Rename: Selected names will be replaced. Use wildcard? to keep the old character. More information about Replace and Rename functions: see sections 4.7.2 and 4.7.3.
8 - 166 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
6.12 Shortcut Menu Tab
Property
Description
Show Default shortcut menu
Uses the default menu for a display, sysdefault_sm.xml.
Show Customized shortcut menu
Uses the specified custom menu.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 167
7
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
7.1
Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options) This chapter describes how to set up various HMIWeb Display Builder options. It also describes keyboard and menu shortcuts. To configure the options, select Tools / Options to see the Options window and then specify the options on each tab:
7.1.1
•
General Tab
•
Grids and Rulers Tab
•
Shapes Tab
General Tab
8 - 168 • Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Option
Description
Default scripting language
Specifies the default scripting language. Either VBScript or JScript.
Number of Undo/Redo Levels
Specifies the maximum number of undos/redos that you can perform. See 3.19 Undoing Your Work. Note: HMIWeb Display Builder’s memory requirements may exceed your computer’s capabilities if you specify too large a number.
Recently used file list
Specifies the number of recently used files HMIWeb Display Builder lists under the File menu.
Save AutoRecover info every
If this option is selected, the “autorecover” version of any open display is saved at the specified frequency. If HMIWeb Display Builder crashes, it asks you whether you want to open the autorecover version when you restart it.
Change mouse cursor when over a selectable object
If this option is selected, the cursor changes from to when move over a selectable/editable object. (The mouse pointer will not change if, for example, you move it over a locked object.) You should consider deselecting this option if you are working on a complex display. (The extra processing involved in determining whether an object is selectable can affect performance.)
Show Intellisense autocompletion list in script editor
If you select this option, you activate the Script Editor's Intellisense feature. (IntelliSense displays information in lists and pop-ups as you write your code. For example, it displays the available properties, methods and events of objects.)
Archive file format
The file format used when saving a display in archive format. Use the default file format (Text) unless you have a specific need to use Binary.
Save unarchived copy of file with archive files
If you select this option, two versions of a display are saved each time you save it in archive format: Archive (*.hda or *.hsa) Standard (*.htm or *.sha) Note that if you save a display in standard format, an archive version is not saved.
7.1.2
Grids and Rulers Tab
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder • 8 - 169
Option
Description
Horizontal spacing Vertical spacing
The horizontal and vertical spacing, in pixels, of gridlines, expressed in pixels. The grid makes it easier to arrange display objects in a neat and consistent manner.
Color
The color of the grid lines.
Snap objects to grid
If this option is selected, objects automatically align to the grid when you create, move or resize them. button on the View toolbar You can also use the to turn this option on/off.
Show grid
If this option is selected, the grid is visible. You can also use the to show/hide the grid.
Show rulers
button on the View toolbar
If this option is selected, the rulers are visible. The rulers make it easier to arrange objects in a neat and consistent manner. You can also use the button on the View toolbar to show/hide the rulers.
7.1.3
Shapes Tab
Option
Description
Search for shape files in
This list specifies the folders HMIWeb Display Builder searches when looking for linked shapes. See below how to add a shape folder to the list. If a display includes a link to a shape that is not in a listed folder, the next time you open the display, HMIWeb Display Builder will replace the shape with a rectangle containing an error message ("Unable to load shape file …"). Similarly, if a display includes an embedded shape that is not in a listed folder, you cannot upgrade it. See 2.8 Upgrading an Embedded Shape.
8 - 170 • Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Option
Description
By default, insert into display
Specifies the default manner in which shapes are inserted into displays: Contents of shape file embeds a copy of the shape file in the display Link to shape file inserts a link to the shape file Note that when you insert a shape, you can override the default by selecting other option in the Insert Shape dialog box.
To add a shape folder to the list: 1. Click Add to add a blank line to the list. 2. Either type the folder’s full path, or click the and browse for the folder.
button
3. If necessary, use the and buttons to rearrange the order of folders in the list. HMIWeb Display Builder searches through the folders in the order listed.
7.2
Creating a Toolbar (Tools / Customize) You can create your own toolbars that only contain the tools/menus you want. To create a toolbar: 1. Select Tools / Customize to open the Customize dialog box. 2. Click New on the Toolbars tab to open the New Toolbar dialog box. 3. Type the toolbar’s name and click OK. An empty, small toolbar appears on the HMIWeb Display Builder window and the name of the toolbar appears in list of the Customize dialog box. 4. Click the Command tab in the Customize dialog box. 5. Select a category that contains items (icons or menus) you want to include in your toolbar. 6. Drag each item to your toolbar. (This copies the item to your toolbar — it doesn’t delete it from the original toolbar.) 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for items in other categories. As with the other toolbars, you can show/hide your toolbar and drag it to a convenient place.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder • 8 - 171
7.3
Keyboard Shortcuts Command
Shortcut
Align the left edges of selected objects
CTRL+Q
Align (horizontally) the centers of selected objects
CTRL+W
Align the right edges of selected objects
CTRL+E
Align the top edges of selected objects
CTRL+1
Align (vertically) the middle of selected objects
CTRL+2
Align the bottom edges of selected objects
CTRL+3
Bring selected object to top of stack
CTRL+PAGE UP
Bring selected object one layer up (towards the top of) the stack
SHIFT+PAGE UP
Copy selected object to the clipboard
CTRL+C
Create a new (standard) display
CTRL+N
Cut selected object to the clipboard
CTRL+X
Delete selected object
DELETE
Duplicate selected object
CTRL+D
Group selected objects
CTRL+G
Open a display
CTRL+O
Paste contents of clipboard into display
CTRL+V
Print current display
CTRL+P
Redo command that has been undone
CTRL+Y
Save current display
CTRL+S
Select all objects
CTRL+A
Send selected object to bottom of stack
CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Send selected object one layer down (towards the bottom of) the stack
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Show/hide Script Editor
CTRL+ENTER
Show/hide Properties window
ALT+ENTER
Undo action
CTRL+Z
Ungroup selected group
CTRL+U
8 - 172 • Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
7.4
Shortcut Menu If you right-click (press the right mouse button) on the display or object(s), a shortcut menu appears next to the mouse pointer.
Item
Description
Cut
Cut the selected object(s) to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected object(s) to the clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the clipboard near the center of the display. If Paste is gray, it means the clipboard is empty.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected object(s).
Delete
Deletes the selected object(s).
Arrange
Gives access to the same alignment and grouping functions as the 1.4.5 Arrange Toolbar.
Transformations
Gives access to the same transform functions as the 1.4.7 Transform Toolbar.
Edit Properties
Shows the Properties window.
Edit Script
Shows the Script Editor window.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder • 8 - 173
8
Distributing Displays
8.1
Display Storage Techniques You can use of the following storage techniques for your displays:
8.2
•
Centralized. All displays are stored on the server, and accessed by Stations as required
•
Distributed. Each Station has its own copies in a local folder. (This technique reduces communication traffic and callup delays because Stations can show the displays without having to first them.)
Distribution Issues Unless you create displays on the server and use the centralized storage technique, you need to copy them to the appropriate computer(s) and check that they work correctly. Issue
Notes
Shapes and popups
Shapes and popups are linked to the displays, not embedded in them. This means that you also have to copy these files. You have to copy linked shapes and popups to folders that are ed in Station. (When asked to call up a display, Station only searches the ed folders.)
Associated folders
Each display (and shape/popup) has an associated folder that contains various files and graphics. These folders have the same name as the display, but with a “_files” extension. Copying a display will also cause the associated folder to be copied.
8 - 174 • Distributing Displays
Point IDs and database links
Check that all dynamic objects in a display show the correct data — when configuring an object, it is easy to mistype a point ID or database address.
DSP displays
If you are also distributing DSP displays, refer to the Display Building Guide for the distribution details — the procedures are slightly different.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
HMIWeb Display Building Guide
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide Release: System Release 711 01/2009 HMIWebDisplayBuildingGuide_Eng.doc
Section:
8-
Notices, Copyright, and Trademarks While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreements with and for its customers. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice. © Copyright 1989 – 2007 by Honeywell Oy. No part of this publication may be reproduced or translated, stored in a database or retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Honeywell Oy. Experion ® Process Knowledge System (PKS) is a ed trademark of Honeywell International Inc. All other brand or product names mentioned in the document are trademarks of their respective owners. Honeywell Oy Viestikatu 1-3 FIN-70600 Kuopio, Finland Phone +358 20752 2000 Telefax +358 20752 2400 http://www.honeywell.fi
Contents 1
Getting Started 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
1.9
2
1
The Basics ................................................................................................................................1 Starting HMIWeb Display Builder ......................................................................................1 Layout of the main window .................................................................................................1 Toolbars ...................................................................................................................................3 1.4.1 Displaying/hiding toolbars....................................................................................3 1.4.2 Standard Toolbar .....................................................................................................3 1.4.3 PMD toolbox Toolbar ..............................................................................................4 1.4.4 Toolbox Toolbar .......................................................................................................7 1.4.5 Arrange Toolbar .......................................................................................................8 1.4.6 View Toolbar ............................................................................................................9 1.4.7 Transform Toolbar .................................................................................................10 1.4.8 Format Toolbar.......................................................................................................10 1.4.9 Drawing Toolbar ....................................................................................................11 1.4.10 Scripting Toolbar....................................................................................................12 Object Explorer.....................................................................................................................12 Point Browser .......................................................................................................................13 Properties Window ..............................................................................................................14 PMD Display Object Library ..............................................................................................16 1.8.1 Naming of the shapes............................................................................................17 1.8.2 Dynamic Shapes.....................................................................................................18 1.8.3 Static shapes............................................................................................................23 Shape Gallery........................................................................................................................29
Creating Displays 2.1 2.2
2.3 2.4
2.5
2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11
31
Display Types .......................................................................................................................31 Creating a standard display ...............................................................................................31 2.2.1 Creating a display from a Web Page ...................................................................32 2.2.2 Saving a display .....................................................................................................32 Creating a popup or faceplate ............................................................................................33 Creating a Shape Sequence .................................................................................................34 2.4.1 Using a Shape Sequence as a Status Indicator ...................................................36 2.4.2 Using a Shape Sequence as an Animation..........................................................37 2.4.3 Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display.........................................................37 Creating a Dynamic Shape .................................................................................................38 2.5.1 Custom Properties .................................................................................................38 2.5.2 Dynamic Objects ....................................................................................................38 2.5.3 Creating a Dynamic Shape ...................................................................................38 2.5.4 Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display .........................................................40 2.5.5 Example of a dynamic shape................................................................................41 Creating a Point Detail (Template) Display .....................................................................43 Embedding a linked shape .................................................................................................45 Upgrading an Embedded Shape........................................................................................45 Guidelines for Optimizing Display Performance............................................................46 2.9.1 Display-creation Guidelines .................................................................................46 About display templates .....................................................................................................47 About archive format ..........................................................................................................48
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Contents • 8 - i
2.12
2.13
3
Drawing Techniques 3.1 3.2 3.3
3.4
3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16
3.17 3.18
3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24
4
55
Drawing Techniques - overview........................................................................................55 Setting Drawing Defaults....................................................................................................55 Creating Objects ...................................................................................................................56 3.3.1 Creating a Bezier Curve ........................................................................................57 3.3.2 Creating a new object from overlapping objects ...............................................58 Selecting Objects...................................................................................................................59 3.4.1 Selection handles....................................................................................................60 3.4.2 Reference Object.....................................................................................................60 3.4.3 Deselecting Objects ................................................................................................60 Deleting Objects ...................................................................................................................60 Resizing Objects ...................................................................................................................61 Duplicating Objects..............................................................................................................61 Locking Objects ....................................................................................................................61 Aligning Objects...................................................................................................................62 Distributing Objects .............................................................................................................62 Grouping Objects .................................................................................................................63 Flipping Objects ...................................................................................................................64 Rotating Objects ...................................................................................................................64 Combining objects to improve display performance......................................................64 Changing the Stacking Order .............................................................................................65 Using the Node Editor.........................................................................................................66 3.16.1 Editing an Object’s Nodes.....................................................................................66 3.16.2 Adding a Node.......................................................................................................66 3.16.3 Editing an Object’s Curve Control Handles.......................................................67 Moving Objects with the Arrow Keys...............................................................................67 Defining an object’s color....................................................................................................68 3.18.1 Selecting a Non-standard Color...........................................................................68 3.18.2 Applying a Gradient Fill .......................................................................................69 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants......................................................................69 Undoing Your Work ............................................................................................................71 Inserting a Graphic ..............................................................................................................71 3.20.1 About graphic formats ..........................................................................................72 Inserting Text from Another Application.........................................................................73 Inserting an ActiveX Document.........................................................................................74 Inserting an ActiveX Control..............................................................................................74 URL Formats.........................................................................................................................75
PMD Object Properties 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6
ii • Contents
PMD Display Data Validation............................................................................................49 2.12.1 General ....................................................................................................................49 2.12.2 Validate the active display....................................................................................49 2.12.3 Validate displays in a directory ...........................................................................51 Tools for PMD displays.......................................................................................................52 2.13.1 Setting the department name with HDBSetDeptDisplays tool .......................52 2.13.2 Resaving the displays with HDBOpenSaveDisplays tool ................................53
76
PMD Object Properties – overview ...................................................................................76 Animation Tab......................................................................................................................76 Behaviors Tab .......................................................................................................................77 Colors Tab .............................................................................................................................78 Custom Properties Tab........................................................................................................79 PMD Data Tab ......................................................................................................................79 4.6.1 Static objects............................................................................................................81 4.6.2 Hyperlink ................................................................................................................82 4.6.3 Filled Rectangle ......................................................................................................82 4.6.4 Filled Oval...............................................................................................................83 HMIWeb Display Building Guide HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.7
4.8
4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12
4.6.5 Filled Polygon.........................................................................................................83 4.6.6 Blinking rectangle ..................................................................................................84 4.6.7 Numerical Output..................................................................................................85 4.6.8 Numerical Entry.....................................................................................................85 4.6.9 Text Output.............................................................................................................86 4.6.10 Conditional Text Output.......................................................................................87 4.6.11 Text Entry................................................................................................................87 4.6.12 Entry ......................................................................................................88 4.6.13 Signal Controlled Text...........................................................................................88 4.6.14 Bar ............................................................................................................................89 4.6.15 PistonBar .................................................................................................................90 4.6.16 Profile.......................................................................................................................91 4.6.17 Table.........................................................................................................................92 4.6.18 Mode ........................................................................................................................93 4.6.19 One-way Motor or One-way Motor (Pump) ......................................................94 4.6.20 Two-way Motor or Two-speed Motor ................................................................94 4.6.21 Valve ........................................................................................................................95 4.6.22 Three-way Valve ....................................................................................................96 4.6.23 Vertical Spindle Valve or Motor Valve ...............................................................96 4.6.24 Device Control 2/2 ................................................................................................97 4.6.25 Device Control 3/4 ................................................................................................98 4.6.26 General Logic..........................................................................................................98 4.6.27 Binary.......................................................................................................................99 4.6.28 Binary Button..........................................................................................................99 4.6.29 Signal Button ........................................................................................................100 4.6.30 Checkbox (FC data) .............................................................................................100 4.6.31 Combobox (FC data)............................................................................................100 4.6.32 Insert ActiveX Document....................................................................................101 4.6.33 Insert Picture from file.........................................................................................101 4.6.34 Insert Shape from File..........................................................................................101 4.6.35 Insert ActiveX Control.........................................................................................101 4.6.36 Alphanumeric (FC data) .....................................................................................101 4.6.37 Indicator (FC data)...............................................................................................102 PMD Blocks Tab .................................................................................................................102 4.7.1 Changing the department name for the data connections .............................103 4.7.2 Changing (Replace) the block names for the data connections .....................104 4.7.3 Changing (Rename) the block names for the data connections.....................105 Details Tab ..........................................................................................................................107 4.8.1 Static Pushbutton .................................................................................................107 4.8.2 Hyperlink ..............................................................................................................107 4.8.3 Numerical Output................................................................................................108 4.8.4 Numerical Entry...................................................................................................109 4.8.5 Text Output...........................................................................................................109 4.8.6 Conditional Text Output.....................................................................................110 4.8.7 Text Entry..............................................................................................................111 4.8.8 Entry ....................................................................................................112 4.8.9 Bar ..........................................................................................................................112 4.8.10 PistonBar ...............................................................................................................113 4.8.11 Checkbox (FC data) .............................................................................................113 4.8.12 Insert ActiveX Document....................................................................................113 4.8.13 Insert Picture from File........................................................................................114 4.8.14 Insert Shape from File..........................................................................................114 4.8.15 Alphanumeric (FC data) .....................................................................................114 4.8.16 Indicator (FC data)...............................................................................................116 Entry Tab.............................................................................................................................116 Font Tab...............................................................................................................................117 General Tab.........................................................................................................................118 Lines Tab .............................................................................................................................119
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Contents • 8 - iii
4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18
4.19
5
EPKS Object Properties 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
5.7 5.8
5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 iv • Contents
Link Tab...............................................................................................................................120 Popup Tab ...........................................................................................................................120 Signal Tab............................................................................................................................121 Task Tab ..............................................................................................................................121 Toggle Tab...........................................................................................................................122 Profile object Design Guide ..............................................................................................122 4.18.1 General Tab...........................................................................................................122 4.18.2 PMD Data Tab ......................................................................................................122 4.18.3 PMD Blocks Tab ...................................................................................................124 4.18.4 Series Tab ..............................................................................................................125 4.18.5 Title Tab.................................................................................................................126 4.18.6 Legend Tab ...........................................................................................................127 4.18.7 Tab...............................................................................................................128 4.18.8 Left Axis Tab / Bottom Axis Tab.......................................................................129 4.18.9 Walls Tab...............................................................................................................130 4.18.10 Selectors Tab .........................................................................................................131 Table object Design Guide ................................................................................................131 4.19.1 General Tab...........................................................................................................131 4.19.2 PMD Data Tab ......................................................................................................132 4.19.3 PMD Blocks Tab ...................................................................................................136 4.19.4 Font Tab.................................................................................................................136 4.19.5 Value Format Tab.................................................................................................136 4.19.6 Appearance Tab ...................................................................................................137 4.19.7 ColRow Tab ..........................................................................................................137 4.19.8 Settings Tab...........................................................................................................138
139
EPKS Object Properties – overview.................................................................................139 Animation Tab....................................................................................................................139 Behaviors Tab .....................................................................................................................140 Colors Tab ...........................................................................................................................141 Custom Properties Tab......................................................................................................141 Data Tab ..............................................................................................................................141 5.6.1 Defining a Link To a Point..................................................................................142 5.6.2 Defining a Link to a Database File.....................................................................142 Data Tab (Alarm table)......................................................................................................143 Details Tab ..........................................................................................................................144 5.8.1 ActiveX Document...............................................................................................144 5.8.2 Alarm table ...........................................................................................................144 5.8.3 Alphanumeric.......................................................................................................145 5.8.4 Chart ......................................................................................................................146 5.8.5 Checkbox...............................................................................................................146 5.8.6 Combobox .............................................................................................................146 5.8.7 Hyperlink ..............................................................................................................147 5.8.8 Indicator ................................................................................................................147 5.8.9 Push button...........................................................................................................147 5.8.10 Shape......................................................................................................................148 Filters Tab............................................................................................................................148 Font Tab...............................................................................................................................149 General Tab.........................................................................................................................149 Lines Tab .............................................................................................................................150 Options Tab.........................................................................................................................150 Popup Tab ...........................................................................................................................150 Acronyms ............................................................................................................................151 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms .............................................................................................152 Sorting tab ...........................................................................................................................152 About vector graphic objects ............................................................................................153 HMIWeb Display Building Guide HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.18 5.19
6
Display Properties 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7
6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12
7
159
Display Properties – overview .........................................................................................159 Appearance Tab .................................................................................................................159 Callup Task Tab..................................................................................................................160 Custom Properties Tab......................................................................................................161 Details Tab ..........................................................................................................................161 General Tab.........................................................................................................................162 Help Tab ..............................................................................................................................162 6.7.1 Specifying a Topic in a HTML Help File ..........................................................162 6.7.2 Specifying Help Other Than HTML Help ........................................................163 Keys Tab ..............................................................................................................................163 Periodic Task Tab...............................................................................................................164 PMD Blocks.........................................................................................................................165 PMD General ......................................................................................................................166 Shortcut Menu Tab ............................................................................................................167
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder 7.1
7.2 7.3 7.4
8
About alarm and event tables ..........................................................................................153 About trends .......................................................................................................................154 5.19.1 Chart area..............................................................................................................155 5.19.2 Axis ........................................................................................................................157 5.19.3 Toolbar...................................................................................................................158 5.19.4 Legend ...................................................................................................................158
168
Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options) ..................................168 7.1.1 General Tab...........................................................................................................168 7.1.2 Grids and Rulers Tab...........................................................................................169 7.1.3 Shapes Tab ............................................................................................................170 Creating a Toolbar (Tools / Customize).........................................................................171 Keyboard Shortcuts ...........................................................................................................172 Shortcut Menu ....................................................................................................................173
Distributing Displays 8.1 8.2
174
Display Storage Techniques .............................................................................................174 Distribution Issues .............................................................................................................174
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Contents • 8 - v
1
Getting Started
1.1
The Basics HMIWeb Display Builder is a specialized drawing application that enables you to create Web-based custom displays. These displays are operated via the system's Interfaces (Station). This document contains instructions for the HMIWeb Display Builder that is used to create custom displays for the Experion PKS with PMD Controller automation system. Custom displays allow you to present information in a sophisticated and -friendly manner — well-designed custom displays make it easier for operators to visualize complex processes, and reduce the probability of operator errors.
1.2
Starting HMIWeb Display Builder To start HMIWeb Display Builder on the server: From the Start menu, select Start / Programs / Honeywell Experion PKS / Server / HMIWeb Display Builder. To start HMIWeb Display Builder on the client computer: From the Start menu, select Start / Programs / Honeywell Experion PKS / Client Software / HMIWeb Display Builder.
1.3
Layout of the main window The following pictures show a typical layout.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 1
In the HMIWeb Display Builder:
8 - 2 • Getting Started
•
The display(s) you are editing appears on the right.
•
The Object Explorer which lists all objects in the display, appears on the left.
•
The Point Browser which displays every point that has been defined on the server to which you are connected, appears on the left
•
The toolbars appear at the top and bottom of the window.
•
The “floating” Properties window shows the properties of the selected object (or the display itself).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
1.4
Toolbars The toolbars provide speedy access to many functions.
1.4.1
Displaying/hiding toolbars To display (or hide) a toolbar: 1.
Select Tools / Customize and click the Toolbars tab to see the list of toolbars. A check mark opposite a toolbar indicates that it is already visible.
2.
Select the toolbars you want to display or hide.
3.
If necessary, drag the toolbar to a convenient location. (If you drag a toolbar to the top or bottom of the window, it will “dock” to the window’s border.)
If you want to create your own toolbar, see 7.2 Creating a Toolbar (Tools / Customize).
1.4.2
Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar includes basic Windows-related buttons such as Open and Save.
Button
Description New Display. Creates a new display. Click the arrow to the right to display the list of display types. See 2.1 Display Types. Open. Opens an existing display. Save. Saves the current display. Save All. Saves all open displays.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 3
Button
Description Cut. Removes the selected object(s) from the display and copies them to the clipboard. Copy. Copies the selected object(s) to the clipboard. Paste. Pastes the clipboard’s contents into the display. Duplicate. Makes duplicates of the selected object(s). Delete. Deletes the selected object(s). Undo. Undoes changes you have made to the display. See 3.19 Undoing Your Work. Redo. Redoes changes you have undone. Print. Prints the display. Print Preview. Shows the display, as it will print. You can then either print the display by clicking Print, or return to editing mode by clicking Close. Preview. Shows the display, as it will appear in Station. Preview also allows you to test scripts, providing the scripts do not require interaction with the server. For example, clicking an object will run the object’s onclick script. Click Close to return to the normal editing mode.
1.4.3
PMD toolbox Toolbar Note! You use the PMD Toolbox toolbar when the system to be defined is a "pure" Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. If the system contains EPKS integration, you'll have to use the Toolbox toolbar, which contains both PMD object creation buttons and EPKS object creation buttons. The PMD Toolbox toolbar contains two types of buttons: •
Editing Buttons (used to edit existing objects)
•
Object-creation Buttons (used to create objects)
Editing Buttons Button
Description Pointer. The main tool you use to select, move and resize objects. See 3.4 Selecting Objects. Zoomer. Zooms in and of the display. To zoom in on a part of the display, first click Zoomer and then click the area of interest. You can zoom in further by clicking repeatedly. To zoom out, hold down SHIFT and click. Rotator. Rotates the selected object(s). See 3.13 Rotating Objects.
8 - 4 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description Node Editor. Allows you to change the shape of an object by moving or adding individual nodes (apexes or reference points). See 3.16 Using the Node Editor.
Object-creation Buttons To see how to use these buttons, see 3.3 Creating Objects. Button
Description Static Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square. Static Rounded Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square with rounded corners. Static Oval. Creates an oval or circle. Static Line. Creates a straight line. Static Polyline. Creates a multi-segment line (which is similar to polygon, but with one open side). To create a polyline, click to mark each node, except for the last, which you mark by double-clicking. Static Polygon. Creates a polygon. To create a polygon, you click to mark each node, except for the last. You mark the last node by double-clicking, which then closes the polygon. Static Bezier Curve. Creates a smooth-curved line. See 3.3.1 Creating a Bezier Curve. Static Arc. Creates an arc (a quarter of an oval or circle). Static Wedge. Creates a segment (quarter) of an oval or a circle. Static Textbox. Creates a box where you can write the text. Static Pushbutton. Creates a button that can activate in the interface (Station) to perform specified functions (behaviors). Hyperlink. Creates a hyperlink. When a clicks the hyperlink in the interface (Station) calls up the URL (such as a Web page) or display that you specify in the Details Tab of the object. Filled Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square and fills the area with the desired color(s). Filled Oval. Creates an oval or circle and fills the area with the desired color(s). Filled Polygon. Creates a polygon and fills the area with the desired color(s). Blinking rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square, which blinks between two colors, if the Blink property is on. Numerical Output. Creates a field, which outputs a value with engineering unit and shows alarm and warning states with colors. Numerical Entry. Creates a field, which allows data entry in the interface. The field shows the value with engineering unit as well as the alarm and warning states with colors. Text Output. Creates a field which outputs text. Conditional Text Output. Creates a field which outputs text conditionally according to the definitions. Text Entry. Creates a field, which outputs text and allows text entry in the interface.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 5
Button
Description Entry. Creates a field, which allows the entry in the interface. Shows asterisks (********) instead of 's characters. Signal controlled Text. Creates a field which outputs static or blinking text controlled by a signal. Bar. Shows a process value by means of a bar or pointer indicator inside the field. The indicator type and moving direction (horizontally/vertically) are defined in the Details Tab. PistonBar Shows two process values graphically overlapping. The second indicator starts always from the "top" of the first indicator and grows to the opposite direction. Profile. Creates a graph, which can show 1-6 values as curves, bars, color arrays or areas. See 4.18 Profile object Design Guide. Table. Creates a table, which can show text, numeric and Boolean arrays. s also data entry. See 4.19 Table object Design Guide. Mode. Outputs the mode text. Property for mode text visibility. One-way Motor. Outputs the symbol for one-way motor. One-way Motor (pump). Outputs the pump symbol. Two-way Motor. Outputs the symbol for two-way motor. Two-speed Motor. Outputs the symbol for two-speed motor. Valve. Outputs the valve symbol. Three-way Valve. Outputs the symbol for three-way valve. Vertical Spindle Valve. Outputs the symbol for vertical spindle valve. Motor Valve. Outputs the symbol for motor valve. Device Control 2/2. Outputs the symbol for 2/2 device control. Device Control 4/3. Outputs the symbol for 4/3 device control. General Logic. Outputs the symbol for general logic. Binary. Outputs the symbol for binary data control. Binary Button. Creates a button that s can click to change the signal status from 0 to 1 or vice versa. Signal Button. Creates a button that s can click to generate the signal status form 0 to 1 or vice versa. Checkbox (FC data) Creates a check box so that s can select or deselect an option. Combobox (FC data) Creates a combobox so that s can select from a list of options in an interactive display. Insert ActiveX Document. Inserts a link to an ActiveX document, such as Word document, into the display. See 3.22 Inserting an ActiveX Document. Insert Picture from File. Inserts a picture (graphic). See 3.20 Inserting a Graphic.
8 - 6 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description Insert Shape from File. Inserts or links a shape sequence or a dynamic shape. See 2.4.3 Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display and 2.5.4 Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display. Insert ActiveX Control. Inserts a link to an ActiveX Control. See 3.23 Inserting an ActiveX Control.
1.4.4
Toolbox Toolbar Note! You use the Toolbox toolbar only when the system to be defined contains EPKS integration. The Toolbox toolbar contains both PMD object creation buttons and EPKS object creation buttons. Next are described only the EPKS object creation buttons (marked with red color in the figure below). See 1.4.3 PMD toolbox Toolbar for explanations of the other Toolbox toolbar buttons.
Button
Description Alphanumeric (FC data). Used to display values in many different formats. Indicator (FC data). Creates a “gauge” that indicates relative values. Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square. Rounded Rectangle. Creates a rectangle or square with rounded corners. Oval. Creates an oval or circle. Line. Creates a straight line. Polyline. Creates a multi-segment line (which are similar to polygons, but with one open side). To create a polyline, click to mark each node, except for the last. You mark the last node by double-clicking. Polygon. Creates a polygon. To create a polygon, you click to mark each node, except for the last. You mark the last node by double-clicking, which then closes the polygon. Bezier Curve. Creates a smooth-curved line. See 3.3.1 Creating a Bezier Curve. Arc. Creates an arc (a quarter of an oval or circle). Wedge. Creates a segment (quarter) of an oval or a circle. Textbox. Creates a box where you can write the text. Hyperlink. Creates a hyperlink. When a clicks the hyperlink in the interface, Station calls up the specified URL (such as a Web page) or display. Alphanumeric. Used to display values in many different formats.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 7
Button
Description Checkbox. Creates a check box so that s can select or deselect an option in an interactive display. Pushbutton. Creates a button that s can click to perform a specified function. Indicator. Creates a “gauge” that indicates relative values. Combobox. Creates a combobox so that s can select from a list of options in an interactive display. Trend. Creates a trend (graph) that shows changes in values over time. See 5.19 About trends. Alarm table. Inserts an alarm icon (as used in the Alarm Summary) which indicates an alarm state. See 5.18 About alarm and event tables. Event Table. Creates a specialized table that lists events. See 5.18 About alarm and event tables. Alarm State. Inserts an alarm icon (as used in the Alarm Summary), which indicates an alarm state. Table. Inserts a table into a display. More information: see Knowledge Builder/ HMIWeb Display Building Guide/Object properties.
1.4.5
Arrange Toolbar The Arrange toolbar contains buttons for aligning and grouping objects.
Button
Description These buttons change order in which objects are stacked on top of each other. See 3.15 Changing the Stacking Order.
These buttons group/ungroup objects. See 3.11 Grouping Objects.
These buttons align objects. See 3.9 Aligning Objects.
These buttons change the size of objects so that they are the same size as a reference object. See 3.6 Resizing Objects.
8 - 8 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description These buttons move objects so that they are evenly spaced. See 3.10 Distributing Objects.
Locks/unlocks an object. Locking an object protects it from being accidentally moved or resized. See 3.8 Locking Objects.
1.4.6
View Toolbar The View toolbar includes a range of editing buttons.
Button
Description Zoom. Sets the “magnification” for the display. Use the Zoomerdisplay.
- to zoom in on a particular part of the
Rulers. Shows/hides the rulers. The rulers make it easier to arrange objects in a neat and consistent manner. Grid. Shows/hides the grid. The grid makes it easier to arrange objects in a neat and consistent manner. To set the grid spacing and color, see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options). Snap-to-Grid. Turns the “snap-to-grid” function on/off. When snap-to-grid is on, objects automatically align to the grid when you create, move or resize them. Properties window. Opens/closes the Properties window, which you use to edit the characteristics of the selected object(s). See 1.7 Properties Window. Script Editor. Opens/closes the Script Editor, which you use to write scripts. (A script is a mini-program that performs a specific task.) Please refer to Knowledge Builder, HMIWeb Display Building Guide for more information. Object Explorer. Shows/hides the Object Explorer, which lists every object in the display. See 1.5 Object Explorer. Point Browser. Shows/hides the Point Browser, which lists points on a selected Experion server. See 1.6 Point Browser. Shape Gallery. Shows/hides the Shape Gallery, which makes it easy to preview and add shapes to your displays. See 1.8 PMD Display Object Library and 1.9 Shape Gallery. HTML Source. Opens the HTML source for the display in a text editor. If you are familiar with HTML, you can change the display by editing the HTML source. Style Sheet. If a style sheet is attached to the display, opens it in a text editor. More information: see Knowledge Builder/ HMIWeb Display Building Guide/ Using advanced display features.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 9
1.4.7
Transform Toolbar The Transform toolbar contains buttons for transforming objects.
Button
Description Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical. These buttons perform mirrorimage transformations on objects. See 3.12 Flipping Objects.
Rotate Left, Rotate Right. These buttons rotate objects +/-90 degrees. See 3.13 Rotating Objects. Union, Difference, Intersection, Exclusive OR, . These buttons create a new object from two or more overlapping objects. See 3.14 Combining objects.
Convert to Path. Converts objects, such as rectangles and circles, to paths (lines and curves). Having converted an object to a path, you can edit its nodes - See 3.16.Using the Node Editor. Combine, Un-Combine. These buttons combine/uncombine static objects, such as lines and rectangles, which helps improve display performance. See 3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance.
1.4.8
Format Toolbar The Format toolbar contains buttons for controlling the appearance of text. You can use Format buttons in two ways:
8 - 10 • Getting Started
•
If you click a button while one or more objects are selected, it only affects the appearance of selected object(s).
•
If you click a button while no object is selected, you change the display’s default value (standard value), which is then used whenever you create new objects in that display. See 3.2 Setting Drawing Defaults.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Button
Description Font. Sets the font of text. Note that you should only use fonts that are loaded on every Station computer. Font Size. Sets the size of text. (If you want to specify a nonstandard size, click the box and type the size—for example: 56.5pt—and then press ENTER.) Bold, Italic and Underline. Set the text’s appearance.
Align Left, Align Right, Center and Justify. Sets the text alignment within a paragraph.
1.4.9
Drawing Toolbar The Drawing toolbar contains buttons for controlling colors and line characteristics. You can use Format buttons in two ways: •
If you click a button while one or more objects are selected, it only affects the appearance of selected object(s).
•
If you click a button while no object is selected, you change the display’s default value (standard value), which is then used whenever you create new objects in that display. See 3.2 Setting Drawing Defaults.
Button
Description Line Color. Sets the line color of objects. Click the button to apply the default color, or click the arrow to the right of the button to select another color — see 3.18 Defining an object’s color. Fill Color. Sets the fill color of objects. Click the button to apply the default color, or click the arrow to the right of the button to select another color — see 3.18 Defining an object’s color. Text Color. Sets the fill color of text. Click the button to apply the default color, or click the arrow to the right of the button to select another color — see 3.18 Defining an object’s color. Line Width. Sets the line thickness. Line Style. Sets the line style, such as solid, dotted and dashed. Start Arrow and End Arrow. Sets the line arrow style.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 11
1.4.10 Scripting Toolbar The Scripting toolbar is used in conjunction with the Script Editor. (Opened/closed with on the View Toolbar.) The Script Editor is used to format scripts. (For details about the Script Editor and writing scripts, see HMIWeb Display Builder’s help.)
Button
Description Indent, Outdent. Indents/outdents the selected line.
1.5
Object Explorer The Object Explorer appears on the left of the Display Builder window. The Object Explorer shows every object in the current display and, in the case of group objects, shows the object hierarchy. If the Object Explorer is not visible, click
on the View toolbar.
The following table describes the tasks you can perform in the Object Explorer. To:
Do this:
Select one object
Click it.
Select several objects
Hold down CTRL and click each object.
Select a range of objects from the list
Hold down SHIFT and click the first and last objects you want to select.
Edit the properties of one or more objects
Select the object(s) as described above and edit the properties in the Properties window(s).
Sort objects to the order in which they are created or stacked on top of each other.
Sort objects in alphabetical order
8 - 12 • Getting Started
at the bottom of the Object Click Explorer. By default, the stacking order is the same as the order in which you created the objects — that is, the first object you created is at the bottom of the stack and the last object is at on the top. You can manually change the stacking order — see 3.15 Changing the Stacking Order. at the bottom of the Object Click Explorer.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To: Show/hide objects within a group
Copy an object to the same or another display
1.6
Do this: icon to the left of the Double-click the object group name. Alternatively click the + / - to the left of the icon. Drag the object from the Object Explorer and drop it on the display.
Point Browser The Point Browser displays every point that has been defined on the server to which you are connected. Note! You can use Point Browser only with EPKS objects.
Using the Point Browser The following table describes the tasks you can perform using the Point Browser. To:
Do this:
Select a point
Click it.
Filter the list of points
Click Show Filter. The enterprise model appears. Expand the model by which you want to filter and click the appropriate entity in the model. The point list changes to show only those points that belong to the entity.
Remove the filter
Click Clear Filter.
Connect to a different server
Click the Change button. Select the server from the list of servers and click OK.
Include a point in display
Click on the point name in the Point Browser and then drag and drop the point on the display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 13
1.7
To:
Do this:
Apply a point to a display element
Choose one of the following: - Drag the point name from the point browser onto the "point" field of the data property page of the display element. - Select the display element then select the point in the point browser and click Apply.
Properties Window You use the Properties window to view and edit the properties of the selected object(s). The properties include physical characteristics, such as color and size, as well as database link details. You also use the Properties window to view and edit the display’s properties — these appear when no objects are selected. If the Properties window is not visible, click
on the View toolbar.
The Properties window may change whenever you select another object. In the following picture, the left-hand example shows the PMD Data Tab of the Properties window for a Device Control (4/3) object, whereas the right-hand example shows the PMD Data Tab when you select a Valve object.
The Properties window is modeless, which means that the selected object(s) change as soon as you change a property’s value. (Unlike a standard dialog box, you do not have to click an OK button.) Properties are grouped according to the tabs that run across the top of the Properties window. The following picture shows how the window changes as you click the tabs.
8 - 14 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The Properties window also changes if you: •
Select several objects of the same type. Any properties whose values are not identical are blanked or grayed out. For example, Name in the General tab will be blank because each object has a unique name. If you edit a property, you change all selected objects — for example, if you change Fill Color to red, they will all turn red. Note! If you select several PMD objects, you can change only their general (EPKS) properties. PMD specific tabs are grayed out.
•
Select objects of various types, such as a pushbutton and an alphanumeric. In this case, the window only displays tabs that are shared by all selected objects. For example, if you selected an alphanumeric and a pushbutton, you could change the properties on the Font tab because both objects contain text.
•
Deselect all objects. The Properties window then shows the display’s properties, and its title changes to “Display Properties”.
For a description of each property, see 4 PMD Object Properties 6 Display Properties 5 EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 15
1.8
PMD Display Object Library PMD Display Object Library includes pre-built shapes that make editing custom displays faster and easier. You can, for example, add machine parts to the display and represent the tag states better than with the basic display objects. The shapes can be used in the displays of the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. You can preview the shapes with help of the Shape Gallery. The Shape Gallery makes it easy to preview and insert shapes into your displays. See also 1.9 Shape Gallery. If the Shape Gallery is not visible, click
on the View toolbar.
The PMD Display Object Library is located in the directory C:\Program Files\Honeywell\PMDC\HMIWeb PMD\HMIWeb Display Builder\PMD Display Object Library. You can select the shape library directory by pressing the window.
at the top of
To configure the Shape Gallery, see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options). To preview shapes: •
Select the appropriate folder in the left-hand pane. A oneline summary of each file appears in the right-hand pane.
•
If you want to preview each shape, click the
button.
To insert a shapes into a display, either: •
Drag it from the list and drop it into the display.
Right-click it and select Insert Into Display from the shortcut menu. Select the option Contents of shape file and click OK in the window opened.
8 - 16 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
1.8.1
Naming of the shapes The names of the shapes included in the PMD Display Object Library (e.g. PMD_Pump_h_mai_01.sha) contain the following fields:
Experion PKS with PMD Controller
alarm
information
PMD_XXX_h_psomai_01 index number
shape’s function
PV SP
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
OP
Mode
Getting Started • 8 - 17
1.8.2
Dynamic Shapes The following table shows the dynamic shapes included in the PMD Display Object Library.
Buttons:
PMD_BinButton_h_i_01.sha
Devices: PMD_Device2_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Device3_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Device2_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Device3_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Device2_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_Device3_v_mai_01.sha
Fans:
PMD_Fan_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fan_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fan_v_mai_01.sha PMD_Fan_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Fan_v_mai_02.sha PMD_Fan_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_Fan_v_pai_01.sha PMD_Fan_h_pai_01.sha
8 - 18 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Fan_v_pmai_01.sha PMD_Fan_h_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_l_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_r_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_r_mai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_u_ai_01.sha
PMD_Fanbase_u_mai_01.sha
Motors:
PMD_Motor1W_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_l_ai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_Motor2S_l_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_03.sha PMD_Motor2S_l_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_r_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_mai_04.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 19
PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2S_r_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_02.sha
PMD_Motor2S_r_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_03.sha PMD_Motor2S_r_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_l_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_pai_04.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_01.sha PMD_Motor2W_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_l_pai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_02.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_03.sha PMD_Motor2W_l_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_r_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_04.sha
PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_05.sha
8 - 20 • Getting Started
PMD_Motor2W_r_mai_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Motor2W_r_pai_01.sha PMD_Motor1W_h_pmai_06.sha
PMD_Motor1Wbase_h_ai_01.sha PMD_Motor2W_r_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Motor1Wbase_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_MotorX_h_ai_01.sha
Pumps:
PMD_Pump_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_mai_01.sha PMD_Pump_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_mai_02.sha PMD_Pump_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_Pump_v_pai_01.sha PMD_Pump_h_pai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_v_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Pump_h_pmai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_l_ai_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Pumpbase_r_ai_01.sha
Getting Started • 8 - 21
PMD_Pumpbase_l_mai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_r_mai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_u_ai_01.sha
PMD_Pumpbase_u_mai_01.sha
Valves:
PMD_CntrlValve_h_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValve_v_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValve_v_oi_02.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_h_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_h_oi_02.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_v_oi_01.sha
PMD_CntrlValvePlate_v_oi_02.sha
PMD_MotorValve_h_ai_01.sha PMD_MotorValve_h_oai_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_ai_02.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_oai_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_oai_02.sha
PMD_OnOffValve_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_OnOffValve_h_mai_01.sha 8 - 22 • Getting Started
PMD_Valve_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_h_mai_02.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_OnOffValve_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_OnOffValve_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_Valve_v_mai_02.sha
PMD_ValveFill_h_i_01.sha PMD_ValvePlate_v_mai_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_h_ai_01.sha PMD_ValvePlate_v_mai_02.sha
1.8.3
PMD_ValvePlate_h_mai_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlateFill_v_i_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_h_mai_02.sha
PMD_ValveHand_h_ai_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_v_ai_01.sha
PMD_ValveHand_v_ai_01.sha
Static shapes The following table shows the static shapes included in the PMD Display Object Library. PMD_Canal_01.sha PMD_Canal_02.sha
PMD_Cleaner_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 23
PMD_Cleaner_02.sha
PMD_Cleaner_03.sha
PMD_CntrlValve_v_01.sha PMD_CntrlValve_h_01.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_01.sha PMD_Condenser_01.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_02.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_03.sha
PMD_Conveyor_h_04.sha
PMD_DataAcq_01.sha
PMD_Deculator_01.sha
PMD_Device2_01.sha
PMD_DataEntry_01.sha
PMD_Deculator_02.sha
PMD_Device3_01.sha
PMD_Fan_01.sha
PMD_FC_01.sha
PMD_Filter_02.sha PMD_Filter_01.sha
8 - 24 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Filter_03.sha
PMD_Filter_04.sha
PMD_FwTank_01.sha
PMD_Headbox_02.sha PMD_Headbox_01.sha
PMD_Headbox_03.sha
PMD_Headbox_04.sha
PMD_Lorry_01.sha
PMD_Headbox_05.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Getting Started • 8 - 25
PMD_Mode_01.sha PMD_Mixer_v_01.sha
PMD_Motor1W_01.sha PMD_MotorValve_h_01.sha
PMD_MotorValve_v_01.sha PMD_Motor2S_01.sha
PMD_Motor2W_01.sha
PMD_Pipe_h_01.sha
PMD_Pipe_v_01.sha
PMD_Pipearrow_h_01.sha
PMD_Pipearrow_v_01.sha
PMD_Pulper_01.sha
PMD_Pulper_2.sha
PMD_Pump_01.sha
PMD_Pulper_03.sha 8 - 26 • Getting Started
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_Refiner_h_01.sha
PMD_Refiner_h_03.sha
PMD_Refiner_h_02.sha
PMD_Screen_h_01.sha
PMD_Screen_v_01.sha
PMD_Screen_v_02.sha
PMD_Silo_v_02.sha
PMD_Silo_v_01.sha
PMD_Silo_v_03.sha
PMD_SkipBack_01.sha
PMD_Strainer_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_SkipNext_01.sha
PMD_Strainer_02.sha
Getting Started • 8 - 27
PMD_Tank_h_01.sha PMD_Strainer_03.sha
PMD_Tank_v_01.sha
PMD_Tank_v_03.sha
PMD_Tank_v_02.sha PMD_Tank_v_04.sha
PMD_Tank_v_05.sha
PMD_Tank_v_06.sha
PMD_Valve3W_01.sha
PMD_Tower_01.sha
PMD_Valve_h_01.sha
8 - 28 • Getting Started
PMD_ValveHand_h_01.sha
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD_ValveOnOff_h_01.sha
PMD_ValvePlate_h_01.sha
PMD_Valve_Plate_v_01.sha
PMD_Vat_v_01.sha PMD_WirePit_01.sha
PMD_WirePit_02.sha
1.9
PMD_WirePit_03.sha
Shape Gallery The Shape Gallery makes it easy to preview and insert shape sequences and dynamic shapes into your displays. See 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence and 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape. HMIWeb Display Builder is supplied with pre-built shapes that you can include in your displays. These shapes are stored in C:\Honeywell\Client\HMIWeb Display Builder\ShapeLib, in subjectbased folders. (See also 1.8 PMD Display Object Library for more information about pre-built shapes for Experion PKS with PMD Controller system.) If the Shape Gallery is not visible, click
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
on the View toolbar.
Getting Started • 8 - 29
Note! You cannot insert a linked shape unless you have ed the folder that contains the shape. To configure the Shape Gallery, see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
To preview shape sequences/dynamic shapes: 1.
Select the appropriate folder in the left-hand pane. A oneline summary of each file appears in the right-hand pane.
2.
If you want to preview each shape, click the
3.
If you want to preview individual shapes within a shape sequence (where number of shapes is 2 or more), double-
button.
click it. (Alternatively, select the shape and click the button). To insert a shape sequences/dynamic shapes into a display, either:
8 - 30 • Getting Started
•
Drag it from the list and drop it into the display.
•
Right-click it and select Insert Into Display from the shortcut menu.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2
Creating Displays
2.1
Display Types To select a display type click the arrow to the right of New display button in the Standard toolbar. The display types are: Display type:
Description
Display
A Display is a standard display into which the other display types and objects are associated with to form a project specific custom display. See 2.2 Creating a standard display.
Popup
A Popup is a secondary window that appears when someone clicks the associated object in a display. See 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate.
Shape Sequence
A Shape sequence is, in effect, a "custom" object that is used in displays as a status indicator or an animation. See 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence.
Dynamic Shape
A Dynamic shape is, in effect, a "custom" object that is used in displays to present complex dynamic data. See 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
Note:
2.2
•
You cannot change the display’s type after creating it. For example, you cannot change a display into a shape sequence.
•
An asterisk (*) appears in the title bar, next to the display's filename when you have changed the display, but not saved those changes.
•
If you need to keep track of changes to displays, you should save them in archive format and use a version management tool such as Microsoft Visual Source Safe. (To learn about archive format, see 2.11 About archive format.)
•
The default folder for custom displays is Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract. See 2.2.2 Saving a display.
Creating a standard display Display is a standard display into which the other display types and objects are associated with to form a project specific custom display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 31
To create a new display:
Click the arrow to the right of New display button and select the type Display. A blank display appears. For details about a display’s properties, such as its title, size and background image, see 6 Display Properties. For details about how to add objects into a display and modify them, see 3 Drawing Techniques. For details about how to create and add popups, faceplates, shape sequences and dynamic objects into a display; see 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate, 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence and 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape. For details about validating PMD display data, see 2.12 PMD Display Data Validation.
2.2.1
Creating a display from a Web Page You can create a display that is based on a Web page. For example, you may want to use a modified version of your intranet's home page as Station's default display. Note! If you use the zoom function in HMIWeb Display Builder or Station, scrollbars are not correctly resized. To create a display from a Web page: 1. Select File / Open and select the Web page you want to use. The Web page opens. 2. Select File / Save As and give it a suitable name. It is now a display — which means you can configure its properties and add HMIWeb objects such as buttons and indicators.
2.2.2
Saving a display The display file name is defined using the HMIWeb Display Builder command: File / Save as. Because on a interface (Station), displays are retrieved by using file names, the displays’ names must be defined so that they are as short and descriptive as possible. Numbers may be also be used, provided that the first character in a name is invariably a letter, for example D1, D2, D3... In the planning stage the displays can be saved to the Design module PC to the directory: C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract Use the .htm file extension.
8 - 32 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
When a display is saved for the first time, the HMIWeb Display Builder creates a file name related directory with the _files extension (for example, Menu_files) that will follow the .htm file automatically. Among other things, the _files directory contains the block.pin connection data that have been defined for the display. The _files display directory inhibits the renaming of the display using the Explorer program. If necessary, rename the display with the HMIWeb Display Builder using the Save as command. At the latest in the system’s start-up stage all the displays must be saved to the PMD Server as follows: In case of a non-redundant PMD server save the displays to the server's directory C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract In case of a redundant PMD server 1. Use design module (DM) to create connection to the floating network address (floating IP) of the redundant PMD Controller: - Open the My Computer window - Select Tools / Map Network Drive - Select F in the Drive field - Write in the Folder field \\
2.3
Creating a popup or faceplate A popup is a secondary window that appears when someone clicks the associated object in a display. A faceplate is a specialized type of popup that shows critical information about the point to which the object is linked.
Creating a popup: Click the arrow to the right of New display the type Popup. A blank popup appears.
button and select
For details about a popup’s properties, such as its title, size and background image, see 6 Display Properties. For details about how to add objects into a popup and modify them, see 3 Drawing Techniques. Because operators may not know that a popup/faceplate is attached to an object (other than moving the mouse pointer over the object), you should consider using a visual cue. For example, if a popup/faceplate is attached to an alphanumeric, you could set its Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 33
border color to red (and set the border color of the other alphanumerics to black).
Creating a faceplate: Experion PKS with PMD Controller system contains ready-made faceplates for the following tag blocks: •
measurement
•
control
•
motor
•
valve
•
control switch
•
sequence
•
device control
•
general logic
•
binary.
A faceplate is generated automatically for a tag block once the desired faceplate has been selected and its initial values defined using the PMD Builder’s block definition functions, and the application loaded into the system. The HMIWeb Display Builder is used to attach the faceplate output to a desired object.
Attaching a popup or faceplate to an object: To attach a popup or faceplate to an object: 1. Select the object. 2. Click the Behaviors tab of the Properties window and select either Popup or Faceplate, as appropriate. 3. If you selected Popup, click the Popup tab and specify the popup's filename and initial position. If you selected Faceplate, use the PMD Data tab to define the block of which faceplate you call up. (More information: see 4 PMD Object Properties.) Note! In order to preview a popup in a display, you must the folder in which you store the popup. That is done in the Shapes tab of the Options dialog box. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
2.4
Creating a Shape Sequence A shape sequence is, in effect, a "custom object" that is used in displays as either a:
8 - 34 • Creating Displays
•
Status Indicator
•
Animation
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Notes: 1.
The following rules and restrictions apply to shape sequences: •
Each shape must be a single object or group.
•
Shapes must be arranged (left-to-right/top-tobottom) in the appropriate order. That is, the first shape is the top-left one, and so on.
•
If the shape sequence is to be used as a status indicator, you can use the first shape to represent a "bad value". This shape is only displayed when the value cannot be determined—because, for example, the server cannot access the associated field device. When creating a shape sequence file, you must select Use first shape for bad value on the General tab.
•
If the shape sequence is to be used as a status indicator for a status point, the number of shapes must be greater than or equal to the number of parameter states. (Plus an extra shape if you want a "bad value" shape.) If the shape sequence has more shapes than the parameter has states, the remaining shapes are never used. For example, if a parameter has four states and the shape sequence has nine shapes (including a "bad value" shape), only shapes 2 to 5 shapes are used.
•
A shape can include dynamic objects. However, for performance reasons, you should minimize the use of such objects and thoroughly check the shape sequence's performance before issuing it.
2.
If you intend to add custom properties to the shape, you should give them names that reflect their purpose. For example, if a custom property represents pressure, you could name it "Pressure". (For an introduction to custom properties, see 2.5.1 Custom Properties.)
3.
You should store the shape sequence in a ed folder. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
4.
To learn how to insert a shape sequence into a display, see 2.4.3 Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display.
To create a shape sequence: •
Click the arrow to the right of New display and choose Shape Sequence. A blank shape sequence appears.
•
Configure the shape sequence's properties as appropriate— see 6 Display Properties.
•
Add shapes (objects) as required—see 3.3 Creating Objects.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
button
Creating Displays • 8 - 35
2.4.1
Using a Shape Sequence as a Status Indicator The following figures form a simple shape sequence that is suitable for use as a status indicator for a two-state status point. (In this example, the first shape represents a "bad value" and is only displayed if the server cannot determine the point's value.)
The following table shows the result when this shape sequence is used in a display to reflect the state of a status point. Parameter state:
The result in the display:
0
1
Unknown (”bad value”)
The number of shapes must be greater than or equal to the number of parameter states. (Plus an extra shape if you want a "bad value" shape.) If the shape sequence has more shapes than the parameter has states, the remaining shapes are never used. For example, if a parameter has four states and the shape sequence has nine shapes (including a "bad value" shape), only shapes 2 to 5 shapes are used.
Using a shape sequence with an analog point When a shape sequence is used with an analog point, the shapes are automatically allocated across the point's range (excluding the first shape if it represents a "bad value"). For example, if the value ranges from 0 to 1000, and there are 11 shapes (the first representing a "bad value"), then:
8 - 36 • Creating Displays
•
Shape 2 is displayed if the value is between 0 and 100.
•
Shape 3 is displayed if the value is between 101 and 200.
•
.
•
.
•
Shape 11 is displayed if the value is between 901 and 1000.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2.4.2
Using a Shape Sequence as an Animation The following picture shows a shape sequence that is suitable for use as an animation (when used in conjunction with a script). Each shape, except the first, represents a separate “frame” in the animation — when displayed rapidly in succession they give the impression of a rotating fan. The first shape would be used to represent a stopped fan.
2.4.3
Inserting a Shape Sequence into a Display Notes: •
When you insert a shape sequence, you can either: ƒ
Embed it. This is the recommended option because it optimizes display performance. (This pastes a copy of the shape into the display.) You can make this the default option by choosing Tools > Options, clicking the Shapes tab and selecting the Contents of shape file option.
ƒ
Link to it. (The shape remains in a separate file.)
•
You cannot insert a linked shape sequence unless you have ed the folder that contains it. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
•
You can also insert a shape sequence by dragging the shape sequence from the Shape Gallery
To insert a shape sequence: 1. Click
on the PMD Toolbox toolbar.
2. Move the pointer to the display and drag it diagonally to mark the rectangle where you want to insert the shape. (The top-left of this rectangle marks the top-left of the inserted shape.) When you release the mouse button, the Insert Shape dialog box appears. 3. Select the shape sequence you want to insert, select the appropriate Insert into display option and then click Open. The shape appears in the display. 4. If necessary, move and resize the shape. 5. Open the Properties Window, click the Behaviors tab and select Shape Sequence Animation. The Data and Animation tabs are added to the Properties Window. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 37
6. Click the Data tab and enter the database link details. For example, if you are linking to a particular point parameter, select Point/Parameter from Type of database link, and then enter the appropriate point and parameter details. 7. Click the Animation tab and enter the number of shapes you want to use in Number of shapes. (For example, if the parameter has only four states but the shape sequence contains eight shapes, type 4 to use the first four shapes.)
2.5
Creating a Dynamic Shape A dynamic shape is, in effect, a "custom object" that is used in displays to present complex dynamic data.
2.5.1
Custom Properties Custom Properties are used to map dynamic objects of a dynamic shape to the process data. You define a set of custom properties for the dynamic shape so that when you insert the shape into a display, you can map its dynamic objects to the correct process data. Most dynamic objects, such as the indicator, only require two custom properties. However, for complex objects you may need to define several custom properties.
2.5.2
Dynamic Objects As the name implies, a dynamic object changes appearance as the value of the data item it represents - typically a department.block.pin (point parameter) - changes.
2.5.3
Creating a Dynamic Shape All objects within a dynamic shape must be grouped to form one object. To create a dynamic shape: 1. Click the arrow to the right of New display button and select Dynamic Shape. A blank dynamic shape appears. 2. Double-click the blank dynamic shape to open the Properties Window.
8 - 38 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Configure the General tab properties. 3. Add objects to the dynamic shape and configure them in the normal manner apart from the custom properties for the dynamic objects, see steps 4 and 5. 4. Define the custom properties for the dynamic objects.
a. Open the dynamic shape Properties Window and click the Custom Properties tab. b. Click the Add button to add a blank line to the list. c. Type the custom property's name in Name. (Normally you need the name at least for the department and block.) d. Type the custom property's type in Type. e. Give a suitable description for the custom property. f.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Repeat steps b) to e) for the remaining custom properties.
Creating Displays • 8 - 39
5. Assign the custom properties to the dynamic objects. Select a dynamic object and open the Properties Window for it.
a. Click the PMD Data tab. b. Define the correct pin name for each property in the Property list c. Repeat for the remaining dynamic objects. 6. Group all objects into one group before saving the dynamic shape. (See 3.11 Grouping Objects for more information).
2.5.4
Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display When you insert a dynamic shape into a display, you can •
embed (paste) it. This option is recommended.
•
link to it. In this case, the dynamic shape is inserted into a display by creating a link between the display and the dynamic shape. The shape remains in a separate file.
Note! If the linked dynamic shapes are not stored in the same folder as the displays that use them, you must the shape folder(s) in the Shapes tab of the Options window. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
8 - 40 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To insert a dynamic shape: on the PMD Toolbox Toolbar.
1.
Click
2.
Move the pointer to the display and drag it diagonally to mark the rectangle where you want to insert the shape. (The top-left of this rectangle marks the top-left of the inserted shape.) When you release the mouse button, the Insert Shape dialog box appears.
3.
Select the dynamic shape you want to insert.
4.
Select the appropriate Insert into display option a) Select Contents of shape file to embed the shape (recommended). b) Select Link to shape file to make a link to the shape in which case, the shape remains in a separate file.
5.
Click Open. The shape appears.
6.
If necessary, move and resize the shape.
7.
Open the shape's Properties Window.
Click the Custom Properties Tab and, for each custom property, specify the appropriate data in Value. 8.
2.5.5
Define the other required properties for the shape.
Example of a dynamic shape The following picture shows a typical dynamic shape that contains:
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
•
One dynamic object - An indicator (the vertical “bar” on the left of the tank), which represents the tank’s current level.
•
Several static objects - such as the tank and the pipes.
Creating Displays • 8 - 41
The following picture shows how the custom properties for the dynamic object (indicator) are defined.
The Properties Window of the dynamic shape.
The following picture shows how the custom properties are assigned to the dynamic object (indicator).
The Properties Window of the indicator object.
8 - 42 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The following picture shows a display in which three copies of this dynamic shape are used to represent three separate tanks. Each copy is configured so that its dynamic object (indicator) shows the correct data for the tank.
The following picture shows how the correct data is connected to the first copy of the dynamic shape.
The Properties Window of the dynamic shape in a display.
2.6
Creating a Point Detail (Template) Display Note! This function is not ed in the PMD system. A point detail display (also called template display) is used to display information about a point of a particular type. Because each type of point has a different data structure, a separate point detail display is required for each point type. Consequently, when you create a new type of container, flexible or CDA point, you must create a matching point detail display. You then add an appropriate dynamic object — such as an alphanumeric or indicator — for each parameter you want s to see. The following procedure summarizes the special steps involved in creating a point detail display. (Other tasks, such as inserting graphics and grouping objects are performed in the normal manner.) To create a point detail display: 1.
Open a new display.
2.
Select View / Properties window to open the Properties window.
3.
Set Type to Point Detail.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 43
4.
Give the display an appropriate Title (in the General tab of the Properties window). For example, make it the same as the name of the point type.
5.
Add an appropriate dynamic object for each parameter you want s to see.
6.
Configure the Data tab properties of the Properties window for each dynamic object, specifying the address details using the appropriate format: •
Container Point Format
•
Flexible Point Format
•
DA Point Format
Container Point Format Property
Description
Type of database link
Select Point/Parameter.
Point
Leave blank.
Parameter
The syntax is: Alias. Parameter Where: •
Alias is the name you defined in Quick Builder for the “contained” (child) point
•
Parameter is parameter name.
For example, if you wanted to display the PV of a contained point whose alias is “HoursRun”, you would type: HoursRun.PV Data entry allowed
Allows s to change the parameter’s value. If you select Data entry allowed, Security Level appears, from which you select the appropriate level. (Only s with the specified level, or higher, can enter data.)
Flexible Point Format Property
Description
Type of database link
Select Point/Parameter.
Point
Leave blank.
Parameter
The parameter name.
Data entry allowed
Allows s to change the parameter’s value. If you select Data entry allowed, Security Level appears, from which you select the appropriate level. (Only s with the specified level, or higher, can enter data.)
CDA Point Format
8 - 44 • Creating Displays
Property
Description
Type of database link
Select Point/Parameter.
Point
The name of the control module.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Parameter
The syntax is: FunctionBlock. Tag Where:
Data entry allowed
2.7
•
FunctionBlock is the name of the function block within the control module
•
Tag is the name of the tag within the function block
Allows s to change the parameter’s value. If you select Data entry allowed, Security Level appears, from which you select the appropriate level. (Only s with the specified level, or higher, can enter data.)
Embedding a linked shape If a shape is linked to a display, you can embed it. (Embedding pastes a copy of the shape into the display.) Note! Embedding is recommended because it optimizes display performance. Unlike a linked shape, an embedded shape is not automatically upgraded if you subsequently change the shape. If you want to upgrade an embedded shape, see 2.8 Upgrading an Embedded Shape. To embed one or more linked shapes:
2.8
1.
Select the linked shape(s). If you want to select a lot of shapes, it is easier to select them using the Object Explorer.
2.
Choose Tools > Embed Shapes.
3.
Click OK.
Upgrading an Embedded Shape If you embed a shape into a display and you subsequently change the shape, you may want to update the embedded copy in the display. Note! The following procedure only works if the shape is in a ed folder. See 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options). To update one or more embedded shapes: 1. Select the embedded shape(s). 2. Select Tools / Upgrade Embedded Shapes to open the Upgrade Embedded Shapes dialog box. 3. Click Upgrade.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 45
2.9
Guidelines for Optimizing Display Performance These guidelines describe how to achieve the best performance for your displays.
2.9.1
Display-creation Guidelines Minimize the Object Count The processing required to call up a display depends primarily on the object count, almost regardless of the complexity of individual objects. You can reduce the object count, without affecting the display's appearance, by: •
Using the Polyline tool to draw complex lines, rather than using the Line tool to draw a series of straight lines.
•
Using the Combine tool to convert several objects into a single object. Avoid using excessive nesting with the Group tool because this creates additional group objects.
•
Using a third-party package to create separate graphics for complex static components, such as backgrounds, and then inserting them into the display. Such graphics are treated as single objects, regardless of their internal complexity.
Suitable formats for inserted graphics are: •
WMF (Windows MetaFile) and EMF (Enhanced MetaFile). These are vector formats that result in small files that scale well.
•
PNG. This is best for bitmap graphics with transparent backgrounds.
•
JPEG. This is best for photographic-type images.
Note that the above techniques are only necessary if the display is particularly complex, or if it contains numerous shapes. If you are preparing a shape library for general usage, you should pay particular attention to the above techniques, so that the performance of displays that make extensive use of your shapes is not compromised.
Minimize the number of Active Objects You can improve a display's performance by minimizing the number of active objects, such as alphanumerics and indicators or animations. This also has usability advantages because, from an operator's point of view, simple and uncluttered displays are generally easier to use.
8 - 46 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
When a display is called up or refreshed, each active object retrieves multiple process parameters from the server — even a simple object such as an alphanumeric, requires about five parameters, such as Value, Alarm State and Scan Status. Consequently, a display with a large number of active objects may have performance problems because of the number of parameters that must be retrieved.
Use the Supplied Shapes You should use the shapes supplied with HMIWeb Display Builder wherever possible because they have been optimized for display performance. See 1.8 PMD Display Object Library. Apart from improving display performance, the supplied shapes make it easier to create visually consistent displays.
Deselect Unused Object Behaviors Deselect any object behaviors that are not required — some behaviors, such as color breakpoints, involve additional processing even if they are not used.
Minimize the Use of ActiveX Controls ActiveX controls take slightly longer to render than native HMIWeb objects. You should therefore avoid using large numbers of ActiveX controls.
Embed Shapes Where possible, embed shapes into displays by deselecting the Link to shape file option.
Minimize the Number of Scripts The performance of a single, long script is better than several short scripts. For example, try writing a single, long script on one object event rather than several short scripts on several object events. Instead of writing a script to create a custom behavior for an object, consider using standard behaviors.
Use only Allowed Data Connections Data connections can be made only to the same department, in which the display is saved. (In Experion PKS with PMD Controller system, references between departments can be used only between PMD Controllers.)
2.10 About display templates Display templates make it easier to create new displays and to keep them visually consistent. (A template is a display that is stored in the HMIWeb Display Builder's Templates folder.) For example, if you need to create a set of displays that require the same background image and the same set of buttons, you would create a display that contains the image and the buttons, and then Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 47
save it in the Templates folder. Then, when you want to create one of these displays, you simply select the template. Note: •
Displays are not linked to the templates. For example, displays do not change if you subsequently change the contents or layout of a template on which they were based.
•
You use a template to create other templates. For example, if you wanted to use the same background image on all your displays, you could create a "base" template that contained the image. Then each time you wanted to create a new template, you would select the base template.
Supplied templates Experion is supplied with the following templates. Template
Description
Point Detail
A point detail display is used to display point information for all points of a particular type. You need to create point detail displays if you have any specialized point types. For details, see 2.6 Creating a Point Detail (Template) Display. (Experion is supplied with point detail displays for common point types.)
2.11 About archive format If you need to keep track of changes to displays—for example, you use a version management tool such as Microsoft Visual Source Safe—you should save them in archive format. When you save a display/shape in archive format, it is saved as a single file, which is suitable for use with version management tools. (If you save a display in standard format, an associated folder is also created that contains various files and graphics. The folder has the same name as the display, but with a "_files" extension.) Archived files have a "hda" (display) or "hsa" (shape) extension. Note! Because you cannot call up an archive file in Station, it is a good idea to set up HMIWeb Display Builder so that displays are simultaneously saved in both standard and archive format. To do this, choose Tools > Options and select Save unarchived copy of file with archive files. Archive format is useful if you want to email a display to someone. To save a display/shape in archive format:
8 - 48 • Creating Displays
1.
Choose File > Save As (or Save if saving for the first time).
2.
Select Display Archives from Save as type.
3.
Specify the filename and click Save.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2.12 PMD Display Data Validation 2.12.1 General PMD display data validation consists of two tools: you can either validate the active display or validate all displays located in a defined directory. The tools can be opened from the menu bar by selecting Tools / PMD Validate Display or Tools / PMD Validate Folder. Display data validation can find the following defects: •
A data reference (“PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin”) does not exist in PDS.
•
An empty data reference in a property that must have a proper value, e.g. “Value (+)”.
•
Array index is invalid, e.g. “PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[0]”, “PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[-1]”, or “PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[level]”.
•
A constant is not valid.
Display data validation cannot find the following defects: •
Data type mismatch between the pin and the display element’s property.
•
Usage of array indexing (“PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[1]”), when the pin isn’t an array.
•
The array index is out of the range, e.g. PDS_BlockPin.dept.block.pin[100], when the pin is an array of length <100.
•
Cannot distinguish what part of a data reference is incorrect.
2.12.2 Validate the active display Select Tools->PMD Validate Display to validate the data references of the currently active display in HMIWeb Display Builder. The results are shown in the PMD Validation Results window.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 49
In this example no incorrect data references have been found in the currently active display. Press Close or
to close the PMD Validation Results window.
In the following example incorrect data references have been found in the currently active display:
8 - 50 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
2.12.3 Validate displays in a directory Select Tools / PMD Validate Folder to validate the data references of the displays found in the selected Display folder.
Press Browse to browse to the Display folder where the displays to be validated locate. Press Validate to validate the displays that can be found in the Display folder. If the folder contains defective displays, their names will be shown in the Defective displays list box
Press or double click (select) a display in the list box to show the PMD Validation Results. Pressing Close or
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
closes the PMD Validate Folder window.
Creating Displays • 8 - 51
Press Open to open the current display to HMIWeb Display Builder Press
to show the PMD Validate Folder window.
Press
to close the PMD Validation Results window.
2.13 Tools for PMD displays The following tools are run from the Command Prompt and they help to do certain tasks for all PMD displays in a same folder. •
Setting the department name with HDBSetDeptDisplays Changes the department name in all displays in a certain folder.
•
Resaving the displays with HDBOpenSaveDisplays - Opens all displays in a certain folder and requests HMIWeb Display Builder to save them.
Note! HMIWeb PMD must be installed on the machine. Note also! Be sure to start and close HMIWeb Display Builder in the PMD environment (i.e. using –startmode PMD) before using the tools. If HMIWeb Display Builder has been used in other environment, e.g. –startmode ExperionPKS, the tools will not work. However, the startmode is normally defined to be PMD at the software installation stage.
2.13.1 Setting the department name with HDBSetDeptDisplays tool The tool HDBSetDeptDisplays sets the department name in all displays in a folder, including all data references in the displays The tool is run from the Command Prompt. Type the command: C:\MyDisplays>HDBSetDeptDisplays NEWDEPT
8 - 52 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the previous example, the command sets the department name NEWDEPT into all PMD displays and data references in the folder c:\MyDisplays. The following messages will be shown during the run.
Press OK.
Close HMIWeb Display Builders as requested and then press OK. Before processing a display, its name is shown:
Press OK for each display.
When all displays have been processed, the count of displays that were successfully updated is shown, e.g. 5 in the figure above. If there were plain HTML documents or HMIWeb displays that do not have PMD data bound onto them, “Not OK” tells the count of them. Press OK. The displays have now been processed.
2.13.2 Resaving the displays with HDBOpenSaveDisplays tool The tool HDBOpenSaveDisplays simply opens all displays of a folder in HMIWeb Display Builder and requests HMIWeb Display Builder to save them. The tool might be useful in a case where the solutions of data references in HMIWeb displays are not updated correctly into the public groups. When the displays have been re-saved, the public groups will be built again as displays are called up in Station.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Creating Displays • 8 - 53
Because this tool opens all HTML documents of a folder – both HMIWeb displays and plain HTML documents – in HMIWeb Display Builder, it runs the migration of these files to the latest HMIWeb display format, as would be done if these files were opened in HMIWeb Display Builder by yourself. The tool is run from the Command Prompt. Type the command: C:\MyDisplays>HDBOpenSaveDisplays No parameters are needed. The command above opens and saves displays by HMIWeb Display Builder in the folder “c:\MyDisplays”. The following messages will be shown during the run:
Close HMIWeb Display Builders as requested and then press OK. Before processing a display, its name is shown:
Press OK for each display. When all displays have been processed, the count of displays that were successfully updated is shown, e.g. 5 below. If there were HTML documents which could not be successfully opened and saved in HMIWeb Display Builder, “Not OK” tells the count of them.
Press OK. The displays have now been processed.
8 - 54 • Creating Displays
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3
Drawing Techniques
3.1
Drawing Techniques - overview These topics describe standard drawing techniques, such as creating, grouping and resizing objects. Note that most of the techniques described here are similar to those used in other Windows-based drawing and paint applications.
3.2
Setting Drawing Defaults When drawing objects, you generally want most of them to have similar characteristics, such as color, line thickness and font. The easiest way of ensuring such uniformity is to set the default values, which are then used whenever you create a new object. Most toolbar buttons show their default settings. For example, if the default text size has been set to 12 points, “12” appears in Font Size. Example Set the default colors to red line and yellow fill: 1. Make sure no object is selected. (If an object is selected, click a blank part of the display, or select Edit / Deselect All.) 2. Click the arrow to the right of to open the color palette.
3.
on the Drawing toolbar
Click the red box.
4. Click the arrow to the right of again.
to open the color palette
5. Click the yellow box.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 55
3.3
Creating Objects You use the Object-creation buttons on the 1.4.3 PMD toolbox Toolbar (and on the 1.4.4 Toolbox Toolbar when required) to create objects. The way in which you use a tool depends on the type of object it creates. The following procedures describe typical creation techniques. To create a regular-shaped object such as a rectangle or pushbutton: 1. Click the appropriate button
,
,
,
or
.
2. Drag the cursor diagonally over the display, and release the mouse button when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape. To create a square/round object, hold down SHIFT while dragging. To create a straight line: 1. Click
.
2. Drag to mark the length and direction of the line. 3. Release the button when the line has the correct length and direction. To draw a line that it is either horizontal, vertical or 45 degrees, hold down SHIFT while dragging. (This also applies when creating segments of a polygon or polyline.) To create a polyline: 1. Click
.
2. Click to mark each node, except for the last. 3. Double-click to mark the last node. To create a polygon: 1. Click
.
2. Click to mark each node, except for the last. 3. Double-click to mark the last node, which also closes the polygon. To create a text box: 1. Click
.
2. Drag the pointer diagonally over the display, and release the mouse button when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape. When you release the mouse button “Text” appears in the box. 3. Type your text. You can start a new paragraph by pressing ENTER. 8 - 56 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To create a hyperlink: .
1.
Click
2.
Drag the pointer diagonally over the display, and release the mouse button when the dotted "outline rectangle" is the correct size and shape. When you release the mouse button "Text" appears in the box.
3.
Delete "Text" and type a suitable the name for the link. (By default, hyperlinks are blue and underlined, but you can change this if appropriate.)
4.
While the object is still selected: a. Open the Properties window. (If it is not visible, click on the View Toolbar.) b. Click the Details tab. c. Specify the link's target, either a Web page or another display. See 5.8.7 Hyperlink.
3.3.1
Creating a Bezier Curve You use the Bezier Curve button to create Bezier curve type of line, such as the one shown in the following picture.
To create a Bezier curve: 1. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
2. Click in the display to mark the first node (start of the curve). 3. Click to mark the first curve control handle. This handle controls the direction at which the curve leaves the first node. 4. Click to mark the second curve control handle. This handle controls the direction at which the curve approaches the second node (end of the curve).
5. Click to mark the second node (end of the curve).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 57
Curve Control Handles A Bezier curve has curve control handles that control the path the curve takes between nodes. The following pictures show how a curve control handle determines: •
The angle at which the curve leaves/reaches the associated node — initially, it goes in the direction of the curve control handle before going towards the other node.
•
The amount the curve deviates from a direct path to the other node — the further the curve control handle is away from its node, the further the curve deviates before going towards the other node.
To change the shape of a Bezier curve after creating it, see 3.16.3 Editing an Object’s Curve Control Handles.
3.3.2
Creating a new object from overlapping objects You can create a new vector graphic object from two or more overlapping vector graphic objects. The following table shows typical results—note, however, that the results depend on the object types and the way they overlap. Notes:
8 - 58 • Drawing Techniques
•
To learn about vector graphic objects, see 5.17 About vector graphic objects.
•
The original objects are deleted.
•
The new object inherits the properties—such as the name, color and line thickness—of the reference object (the first object you select). It also inherits the scripts and dynamic data binding of the reference object.
•
The and buttons are used to combine objects to improve the display's performance—see 3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To create a new object: 1.
Select the overlapping objects.
2.
Click the appropriate button on the Transform toolbar.
If you start with this (the darker object is selected first):
And click this:
You get this:
Union
Difference
Intersection
Exclusive Or
You can only use the button with "open" objects, such as lines and polylines. It is generally used to create a "closed" object from two open objects. (You can then, for example, apply a fill color to the new closed object.)
3.4
Selecting Objects Note! You can also select objects via the Object Explorer. If you want to select all objects in the display, select Edit / Select All. To select one or more objects: 1. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
2. Select the object(s) as appropriate. To select:
Do this:
One object
Click it.
Several objects
Hold down SHIFT and click each object.
Several objects, which are generally close together
Drag the mouse pointer diagonally across the objects. This selects any object that falls entirely within the “selection rectangle” which appears while dragging.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 59
3.4.1
To select:
Do this:
Several objects, some of which are close together
Hold down SHIFT and click each object you want to select. Then, while still holding down SHIFT, drag the mouse cursor diagonally across the other objects — this selects any object that falls entirely within the “selection rectangle” which appears while dragging. You can also reverse the above steps — drag first and then select individual objects.
One object from a stack of objects
Hold down CTRL and click repeatedly until the object you want is selected. Each time you click, the next object in the stack (starting from the top) is selected. Do not click too quickly — if you do, your action will be interpreted as a double-click.
Selection handles When you select an object, a set of eight selection handles appears around the object's boundary. You use these handles when resizing the object.
A Selected Object
3.4.2
Reference Object If you select more than one object, the first object you select is called the reference object. Some drawing techniques make use of a reference object — for example, you can resize objects to make them the same height/width as the reference object. (The selection handles of the reference object are different from the handles of the other objects.)
3.4.3
3.5
Deselecting Objects To deselect:
Do this:
All objects
Click a blank part of the display. (If an object, such as a “background bitmap”, covers the entire display, select Edit => Deselect All.)
One or more objects from a group of selected objects
Hold down SHIFT and click each object you want to deselect.
Deleting Objects To delete one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Press DELETE.
8 - 60 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.6
Resizing Objects To resize one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). Their selection handles appear. 2. Drag one of the selection handles as required. The objects are resized as you drag. If you want to retain the object’s proportions, hold down SHIFT and drag a corner handle. To resize objects so that they are the same size as a reference object: 1. Select the reference object. 2. Select the objects you want to resize. 3. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To make the objects the same:
Click this:
Width as the reference object Height as the reference object Size (width and height) as the reference object
3.7
Duplicating Objects The duplicated object(s) is identical to the original except for the name and position — the duplicated object is offset with respect to the original. The object’s scripts are also duplicated, but any reference to the original object is changed to the duplicated object. For example, if the original script changes the original object’s color, the duplicated script will make the same change to the duplicated object’s color. However, you should carefully check all duplicated scripts to check whether you need to make any further changes. To make duplicate copies of one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Click
3.8
on the Standard toolbar.
Locking Objects Locking objects in place prevents them from being accidentally moved or modified with the mouse. (You can still move and resize a locked object by editing its size and position properties in the Properties window.)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 61
To lock one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). on the Arrange toolbar. Note that the selection 2. Click handles turn grey to indicate that the object is locked.
To unlock a locked object, select it and then click
3.9
a second time.
Aligning Objects To align objects with respect to a reference object (the reference object does not move): 1. Select the reference object. 2. Select the objects you want to align. 3. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To move the objects: Horizontally so that:
Click this: Their left edges are aligned to the left edge of the reference object Their centers are aligned to the center of the reference object Their right edges are aligned to the right edge of the reference object
Vertically so that:
Their tops are aligned at the top edge of the reference object Their centers are aligned to the center of the reference object Their bottoms are aligned at the bottom edge of the reference object
3.10 Distributing Objects Distributing objects means moving them so that their centers are equally spaced horizontally or vertically. When you distribute objects, the outer two objects don’t move — for example, if you select three objects, the inner object moves left/right (or up/down) so that is centered between the two outer objects. To distribute three or more objects: 1. Select the objects. 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar.
8 - 62 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
If you start with this:
And want this:
Click this:
3.11 Grouping Objects You can create a complex object by creating a number of simple objects, arranging them in an appropriate manner and then grouping them. If appropriate, you can “nest” grouped objects to create even more complex objects. When you group a set of objects, you create a group object, which is like any other object - that is, it appears in the Object Explorer, has its own properties and can have its own scripts. If you ungroup a group, you delete the group object, including any scripts attached to it. To group two or more objects: 1. Select the objects. 2. Click on the Arrange toolbar. If the Object Explorer is visible, note that a new group object is created. To ungroup a group select the group and then click
.
Adding objects to (or removing them from) an existing group You can add objects to (or remove them from) an existing group. The advantage of adding/removing objects is that the group (and any scripts attached to it) is not deleted. To add one or more objects to an existing group: 1.
Select the group and the object(s) you want to add.
2.
Choose Arrange > Grouping > Add to Group.
To remove one or more objects from a group: 1.
Using Object Explorer, select the object(s) you want to remove from the group.
2.
Choose Arrange > Grouping > Remove from Group.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 63
3.12 Flipping Objects To flip one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To flip the object(s):
Click this:
Horizontally (as in a mirror image) Vertically (turn it upside down)
3.13 Rotating Objects You can rotate textboxes, graphics and vector graphic objects (to learn about vector graphic objects, see 5.17 About vector graphic objects). Note! If you rotate a group or a shape that contains objects that cannot be rotated, those objects will not rotate. To rotate one or more objects 90 degrees: 1. Select the object(s). 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To rotate the object(s):
Click this:
90 degrees clockwise 90 degrees anti-clockwise
To rotate an object through any angle: 1. Select the object(s). on the Toolbox toolbar. Four rotation handles 2. Click appear.
3. Drag one of the rotation handles clockwise or anticlockwise. As you drag the handle, the object rotates about its center.
3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance You can improve the performance of a display by combining static vector graphic objects—this converts them into a single metafile, which is easier to render.
8 - 64 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Note! To learn about vector graphic objects, see 5.17 About vector graphic objects. Combining objects disables any scripts and database links they may have.
To combine vector graphic objects: 1.
Select the objects.
2.
on the Arrange toolbar to group the objects. (You Click must group the objects before combining them.)
3.
Click
on the Transform toolbar.
If the Object Explorer is visible, note how the group is converted into a single object—that is, it changes from this to this
.
To uncombine a previously combined object: 1.
Select the object and then click
.
The object reverts to a group object. If necessary, you can then click on the Arrange Toolbar to ungroup the objects within the group.
3.15 Changing the Stacking Order When objects overlap, you may need to change the order in which they are stacked on top of each other — unless an object is transparent, it will obscure any objects that are stacked underneath it. Objects are initially stacked in the order in which you create them — that is, each new object is added to the top of the stack. To move one or more objects up or down the stack: 1. Select the objects. 2. Click the appropriate button on the Arrange toolbar. To move the object(s):
Click this:
To the front (top) of the stack To the back (bottom) of the stack One layer up (towards the top of) the stack One layer down (towards the bottom of) the stack
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 65
3.16 Using the Node Editor You use the Toolbox toolbar's Node Editor button to change an object’s shape by moving or adding nodes. The nodes are the object’s apexes or reference points. Note! Some types of object, such as rectangles and ovals, must be first converted to a path (line) before you can select the Node Editor. To convert an object to a path, select it and then click Convert to Path button
on the Transform toolbar.
3.16.1 Editing an Object’s Nodes To edit an object’s nodes: 1. Select the object. on the Toolbox toolbar. A small square marks 2. Click each of the object’s nodes.
3. Move the mouse pointer over a node and drag the node as required.
3.16.2 Adding a Node You can also change an object’s shape by adding a node between two existing nodes. To add a node: 1. Select the object. 2. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
3. Move the mouse pointer over the line between two existing nodes. 8 - 66 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4. Click when the cursor turns into a “cross-hair” — this adds the new node.
5. You can now move this node like any other node.
3.16.3 Editing an Object’s Curve Control Handles Some types of object, such Bezier curves, have curve control handles that control the path the line takes between nodes. See 3.3.1. Creating a Bezier Curve. To edit an object’s curve control handles: 1.
Select the object.
2.
Click
3.
Move the mouse pointer over a curve control handle and drag it to a new position.
4.
Release the curve control handle to see the result.
5.
If the result is not satisfactory, repeat steps 3 and 4.
(Node Editor) on the Toolbox toolbar.
3.17 Moving Objects with the Arrow Keys If you want to move an object a small distance — a technique called nudging — you may find it easier to use the arrow keys than to use the mouse. Each time you press an arrow key, the selected object(s) move one pixel in the direction of the arrow. If you hold down an arrow key, the selected object(s) move slowly in the direction of the arrow. If you hold down SHIFT and an arrow key, the objects move five times faster.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 67
3.18 Defining an object’s color You use the and color of objects.
buttons on the Drawing Toolbar to define the
For example, to change the fill color of one or more objects: 1. Select the object(s) whose fill color you want to change. 2. If you want to: −
Apply the default color (as shown on the button), click .
−
Apply another standard color, click the arrow to the right of button and select the color you want.
−
Apply a non-standard color, see 3.18.1 Selecting a Non-standard Color.
−
Remove the existing color, so that the object becomes invisible (transparent), click the arrow to the right of button and select No Fill.
−
Apply a gradient fill (where two colors blend into each other), see 3.18.2 Applying a Gradient Fill.
3.18.1 Selecting a Non-standard Color For example, to select a custom fill color: 1. Click the arrow to the right of button and click More Fill Colors to open the Color dialog box.
2. Click the point in the “color spectrum” box that has the color you want and then adjust the slider on the “luminance box” (the thin bar on the right). Tip! Alternatively, type the HSL or RGB values in the appropriate boxes. 3. Click the Add to Custom Colors button so that the color appears in the next available Custom colors box. 4. Click the custom color you have just created and then click OK.
8 - 68 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.18.2 Applying a Gradient Fill With a gradient fill, one color is applied to the center of the object and another color is applied to the edges (top/bottom or left/right). In between, the color gradually changes between the two colors.
Typical Gradient Fills — Horizontal (left) and Vertical (right)
Note! You can only apply a gradient fill to some types of object, such as rectangles, ovals and wedges. To apply a gradient fill to one or more objects: 1. Select the objects. the arrow to the right of button and click Fill 2. Click Effects to open the Fill Effects dialog box. 3. Select Horizontal Gradient or Vertical Gradient as appropriate. 4. Select the appropriate Fill Color (center color) and Gradient Color (edge color). 5. Select the appropriate Focus. (The focus defines the relative position between the edges, where the fill color is “pure”. 50% represents the center.) Tip! The Preview box gives an idea of what the gradient will look like. 6. Click OK.
3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants In some cases you may need to define object's colors by using constants in the PMD Data Tab of the Properties Window. Color properties exist e.g. in the PMD Data Tab of Numerical Entry, Text Entry and Entry objects. To define a color, uncheck first the Connect to block pin check box and select the data type String in the Data field of the PMD Data tab. A color is defined by typing either its name (like red) or the RGB color code (like #FF0000 is red). An RGB color code consists of three two-digit hexadecimal numbers specifying the intensity of the corresponding color.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 69
The following table lists the colors ed as of Internet Explorer.
8 - 70 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.19 Undoing Your Work You use the and buttons on the Standard toolbar to undo changes you have made to a display — in effect the buttons work in a similar manner to the Forward and Reverse buttons on a video recorder. Each time you click
, you go undo one change in the sequence of
changes. If you go back too many steps, use
to retrace your steps.
If you click the arrow to the right of a button, the list of actions appears. The most recent action is at the top. You can simultaneously undo/redo several actions by moving the cursor down the list — the actions are selected as the cursor moves over them — and then clicking. The maximum number of changes you can undo is specified in the General tab of the Options window — see 7.1 Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options).
3.20 Inserting a Graphic Inserting digitized photographs, schematic drawings and other suitable graphics can significantly enhance your displays. Notes: •
The inserted graphics are copies of the original graphics, which means that the display will not be updated if you subsequently change the original graphics.
•
Inserting a large graphic, or many small ones, may affect Station's performance when the display is called up.
•
To learn about the graphic formats that HMIWeb Display Builder s, see 3.20.1 About graphic formats.
To insert a graphic: 1. Click
on the Toolbox toolbar.
2. Move the pointer to the display and drag it diagonally to mark the rectangle where you want to insert the graphic. 3. When the rectangle is the correct size/shape and you release the mouse button, the Insert Picture dialog box appears. (The graphic takes on the size and shape of the rectangle that appears while you are dragging.) Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 71
4. Select the graphic and click Open to insert it. 5. If necessary, move and resize the graphic.
Inserting a Graphic from the Clipboard If you are working simultaneously with HMIWeb Display Builder and another drawing application, you can insert graphics via the clipboard. To insert a graphic from the clipboard: 1. Create the graphic and then copy it to the clipboard. 2. Switch to HMIWeb Display Builder and indicate where you want to center the graphic by clicking the center point. 3. Press CTRL+P to paste it into the display. The Save As dialog box appears. (Save the graphic with a suitable name.) The inserted graphic has the same size and shape as in the other drawing application. 4. If necessary, move, resize and group the graphic.
3.20.1 About graphic formats The ideal format for a particular graphic depends on several factors, such its contents (such as a photograph or schematic drawing), its size and its complexity. In practice, it is a good idea to perform some tests to determine which format best suites a particular need. There are two basic types of graphic format: •
Bitmap. Bitmaps consist of an array of colored pixels. Examples of bitmaps are digitized photographs and screen captures. Bitmaps are created in "paint" programs such as Adobe Photoshop and Jasc Paint Shop Pro.
•
Vector graphic formats. Vector graphics consist of "linebased" objects similar to HMIWeb's inbuilt vector graphic objects—see 5.17About vector graphic objects. Examples of vector graphics are schematic drawings and floor plans. Vector graphics are created in "drawing" programs such as Autodesk AutoCAD, Adobe Illustrator and Microsoft Visio.
The following scenarios illustrate how to choose an appropriate format:
8 - 72 • Drawing Techniques
•
You have an AutoCAD drawing of a plant layout that you want to use as a background to your display. In this case, you save the graphic in WMF or EMF format.
•
You want to include a high-quality photograph in your display. In this case, you save the photograph in JPG format.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
•
You want to have overlapping objects, but don't want an object on top to totally obscure the one below. In this case, you save the graphic in PNG format.
The following table lists the graphic formats ed by HMIWeb Display Builder, and summarizes some of their major distinguishing features. Format
Features
Bitmap GIF (*.gif)
Only s 256 colors. Very small file size. Only s on/off transparency.
Portable Network Graphic (*.png)
s many colors. The file size depends on the complexity of the image and number of colors used. s 256 levels of transparency.
Windows Bitmap (*.bmp) Optimized for photographs and other continuous tone images. Note that JPEG uses "lossy" compression which loses some of the original image data. This means that you should keep the original image (at least until the display has been thoroughly tested) in case you need to make any changes.
JPEG (*.jpg)
Vector graphic Metafile (*.wmf)
Suitable for schematic drawings and floor plans.
Enhanced Metafile (*.emf)
An enhanced version of WMF. Suitable for schematic drawings and floor plans.
3.21 Inserting Text from Another Application You can use the clipboard to insert text from other applications. For example, if you want to include a large block of text in your display, you may find it easier to compose it in a text editor or word processor. Note! Formatting is ignored when the text is pasted from the clipboard. (The Paste function ignores everything except the text.) If the text includes HTML/XML tags, the effect may be undefined. To insert text into a display: 1. Copy the text to the clipboard from the other application. 2. Switch to HMIWeb Display Builder and indicate where you want to center the text by clicking the center point. 3. Click
to paste it into the display.
4. If necessary, move, resize and group the text. Tip! If the text block is large, it is easier to use the Properties window to resize the block.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 73
3.22 Inserting an ActiveX Document You can insert an ActiveX document into “window” that is embedded into a display. (Scrollbars appear if the document is larger than the window). ActiveX documents include Microsoft Word documents, and Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. To insert an ActiveX document: 1. Click on the Toolbox toolbar and then drag diagonally across the display to mark size and position of the window for the document. 2. Open the Properties window and click on the Details tab. 3. Type the name of the document in File Name (or click Browse and search for the document).
3.23 Inserting an ActiveX Control Caution! Because of the extremely varied nature of ActiveX controls, you should thoroughly test the operation of displays that include ActiveX controls before releasing them to operators.
Note! The effects of inserting an ActiveX control vary widely, according to the nature of the control. Some controls may, for example, initiate ing and installation of control-related components. If any security-related warning appears, check that it is appropriate to the control you are inserting before proceeding. If you are unsure, you should refer to the relevant Microsoft documentation. Some controls add specialized properties to the Properties window, which you must define. (Refer to the documentation/help supplied with the control for details.) To insert an ActiveX control: 1. Click the arrow to the right of to select the control.
on the Toolbox toolbar
2. Drag diagonally across the display to mark size and position of the “window” for the control. 3. Open the Properties window and configure the control’s properties as appropriate.
8 - 74 • Drawing Techniques
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
3.24 URL Formats The general format for the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of a file or Web site is: Protocol:// ResourceName Part
Description
Protocol
The protocol, which can be http, ftp, gopher, or file. The default protocol is file. If the protocol is not specified, Station assumes that the URL refers to a file, either on the Station computer or on the network.
ResourceName
The resource address or identifier, such as a file or Web address. If the extension is not specified, Station assumes that it is a display file.
Examples The URL for a HTML file called “procedure.htm”, can be specified as either: file://c:\procs\procedure.htm or: c:\procs\procedure.htm The URL for a Web address: http://www.ourwebsite.com The URL for a Word file called “sp.doc”: file://c:\procs\sp.doc
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Drawing Techniques • 8 - 75
4
PMD Object Properties
4.1
PMD Object Properties – overview You access the properties of the selected object(s) through the Properties window. You can call up the Properties window for an object •
by double-clicking the object.
•
by clicking the (Properties window) on the View toolbar. Note! Make sure the correct object is selected.
•
by right-clicking the object and selecting Edit Properties from the menu opened.
The following sections contain detailed descriptions for the Properties in each Tab of the Properties window. For short object specific descriptions see section 4.6 PMD Data Tab.
4.2
Animation Tab The animation tab is used to define the number of shapes in a object. The tab only appears if you select the Shape Sequence Animation (FC data) behavior on the Behaviors Tab. This tab only appears for the shape objects (i.e. Shape sequence or Dynamic Shape object which you insert by using the toolbox toolbar).
8 - 76 • PMD Object Properties
Insert shape from file button in the PMD
Property
Description
Number of shapes
Specifies the number of shapes you use.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.3
Behaviors Tab The Behaviors tab specifies which behaviors are attached to the object. When you select a behavior from the Behaviors tab, the related tabs appears, which you then use to configure the behavior’s properties. For some behaviors you need only one tab to configure properties, whereas for others you need several tabs. Example, if you select Popup behavior, you use only the Popup tab to configure the properties. If you select the Toggle behavior, you need Toggle and PMD Data tabs to configure the properties.
The behavior list indicates which behaviors are available for the object. Description provides a brief description of the behavior. The following table describes the standard behaviors supplied with PMD Objects. Note, all these behaviors are not available for all the objects and some other behaviors may also be supplied for specialized tasks. Behavior
Description
Display Link
When defined this behavior allows the to call up another display by clicking the object in interface (Station). Adds the Link Tab, which you use to specify the display you want to call up.
Faceplate (FC data)
When defined this behavior allows the to call up a faceplate by clicking the object in interface (Station). This behavior is checked as default for the "symbol" objects: One-way Motor, One-way Motor (pump), Two-way Motor, Two-speed Motor, Valve, Three-way Valve, Vertical Spindle Valve, Motor Valve, Device Control 2/2, Device Control 4/3, General Logic and Binary You use the PMD Data Tab to define the block of which faceplate you call up.
Level Fill
"Level indicator" behavior, which is only applicable to some types of object, such as rectangles and ovals. The “level” of the object’s fill color varies in accordance with the value. Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to specify the value (block.pin) details .
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 77
Behavior
Description
Popup
When defined this behavior allows the to call up a popup by clicking the object in interface (Station). Adds the Popup Tab, which you use to define the popup information. For an introduction to popups, see 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate.
Toggle
When defined this behavior allows the to send the signal status from the source to destination. Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to define the signal source and destination. Adds the Toggle Tab, which you use to define the value to be sent to the destination and the acknowledgement for the action. (If you select the Acknowledge property in the Toggle Tab, the object will furthermore get the Entry Tab, which you then use to define the acknowledgement.)
Task
Only applicable to entry objects (Numerical Entry, Text Entry and Entry). Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to define the task source and destination address. If the destination is an array the first array index is updated. Adds the Task Tab, which you use to define the value to be sent to the destination.
Shape Sequence Animation (FC data)
Only applicable to shape objects (created by the Insert Shape from file button). Adds the PMD Data Tab, which you use to specify the value. Adds the Animation Tab, which you use to define the number of shapes. See also 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence.
To define a behavior: 1. Open the object's Properties window and open the Behaviors tab. 2. Select the behavior you want to define. 3. If any new tabs appear, open them and define the behavior’s properties. See instructions for the tab in question.
4.4
Colors Tab The Colors tab controls the object’s colors. The number of colored elements depends on the object’s type. For example, a rectangle has line and fill colors, whereas an Alphanumeric object also has a text color.
8 - 78 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.5
Property
Description
Fill Color
The object’s fill color.
Line Color
The object’s line color.
Level Fill Color
Only applicable to some objects. The color of the bar or pointer used to indicate the value.
Text Color
The text color. Only applicable to objects with text, such as Text Output and Static Pushbutton.
Custom Properties Tab
This Custom Properties Tab is only applicable to a dynamic shape that is inserted into a display. For details how to use this tab, see 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
4.6
PMD Data Tab You use the PMD Data tab to specify the object’s link (data connections) to the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. For some types of objects, such as rectangle and oval, this tab only appears if you select the Level Fill or Toggle behavior on the Behaviors Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 79
Note! Data connections can be made only to the same department, in which the display is saved. (In Experion PKS with PMD Controller system, references between departments can be used only between PMD Controllers.)
The following table contains those PMD Data tab properties that are common to all objects. Property
Description
Property list
Shows all the data properties, which you use to transfer data between the object and the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. At least properties with the (+) mark must be defined. For details about data properties of each object, see the following sections.
Parameters:
Check this checkbox to connect the block.pin data to the property, which is highlighted in the Property list. Uncheck to connect a constant value.
Connect to block.pin. Uncheck for constant value:
Data
The data format for process data is: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN The proper format for defining color by using constant is either the RGB color code (#FF0000) or the name of the color (Red). See 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants. Use the Data field to select the data type for the constant value. The available data types are: Boolean Value may be either TRUE or FALSE. Since the Boolean value is non-numerical, it can be said that: 1 = true, 0 = false and false < true. String: Any character string. Some blank characters, like
8 - 80 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Note! If you use the String data type to define a (text)vector, the proper syntax is: #sarr#First#Second#Third..., where •
the first character (here #) is the separator used between text elements
•
the sarr means that this is a SAFEARRAY
•
First, Second, Third, etc. are text elements, which must be separated by the separator (here #).
Float (32 bit): Max value 3.402823466e+38, Min value 1.175494351e-38 Double (64 bit): Max value1.7976931348623158e+308, Min value 2.2250738585072014e-308 Integer (16 bit): Integer with a sign -32768…32767. LongInteger (32 bit): Integer with a sign –2147483648…2147483647.
In the following there are the descriptions for the PMD Data tab's properties that are specific for each object. (Objects are in the same order as they are located in the PMD Toolbox toolbar.)
4.6.1
Static objects PMD Toolbox contains the following static objects: •
Static Rectangle
•
Static Rounded Rectangle
•
Static Oval
•
Static Line
•
Static Polyline
•
Static Polygon
•
Static Bezier Curve
•
Static Arc
•
Static Wedge
•
Static Textbox
•
Static Pushbutton
The PMD Data tab only appears for static objects if you select the Toggle or Level Fill behavior on the Behaviors Tab. Note, that the Level Fill behavior is only applicable to "area" objects, i.e. rectangle, oval, polygon, and wedge. If you select the Toggle behavior on the Behaviors tab the following properties output on the PMD Data tab: Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+) Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab. PMD Object Properties • 8 - 81
If you select the Level Fill behavior on the Behaviors tab the following properties output on the PMD Data tab: Property
Description
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+) LowerLimit (+)
4.6.2
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab. Example of data connection for Value property: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.SET
Hyperlink Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
4.6.3
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Filled Rectangle Object description: Fills a rectangular area with a color, which is defined by using constant or process data (can be vector). It is possible to change/take off the color (Filled property). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
Fill Filled
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = The rectangle is filled with the color defined by the BackgroundColor property. False (or 0) = The rectangle is filled with the color defined by the Fill Color property in the Colors tab.
Colors BackgroundColor (+)
Fill color. Vector can also be used. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BackgroundColorIndex
Index for the BackgroundColor property when it is a vector.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. See also 4.17 Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
8 - 82 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.4
Filled Oval Object description: Fills an oval/round area with a color, which is defined by using constant or process data (can be vector). It is possible to change/take off the color (Filled property). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
Fill Filled
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = The oval is filled with the color defined in BackgroundColor property. False (or 0) = The oval is filled with the color defined by the Fill Color property in the Colors tab.
Colors BackgroundColor (+)
Fill color. Vector can also be used.
BackgroundColorIndex
Index for the BackgroundColor property when it is a vector.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.5
Filled Polygon Object description: Fills a polygon area with a color, which is defined by using constant or process data (can be vector). It is possible to change/take off the color (Filled property). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
Fill Filled
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = The polygon is filled with the color defined in BackgroundColor property. False (or 0) = The polygon is filled with the color defined by the Fill Color property in the Colors tab.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 83
Property
Description
Colors BackgroundColor (+)
Fill color. Vector can also be used. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BackgroundColorIndex
Index for the BackgroundColor property when it is a vector.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.6
Blinking rectangle Object description: Rectangular area, which blinks between two colors, if the Blink property is on. The Blink property can be on or off. Colors (fill color and blink color) are defined by using constants or process data (can be vectors). The area can be provided with a desired color borderline or with no line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Property
Description
General Color (+)
Fill color when the Blink = false or is not defined. Vector can also be used. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BlinkColor (+)
Blink color when the Blink = true. The color of the area changes between the colors defined in Color property and BlinkColor property. Vector can also be used.
Control (+)
Index for the Color and BlinkColor properties when they are vectors. Define Control = 0, if Color and BlinkColor properties are not vectors.
Blink (+)
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = Blinking on. False (or 0) = Blinking off.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
8 - 84 • PMD Object Properties
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.7
Numerical Output Object description: Shows a process value with possible engineering unit. Shows alarm and warning states with default colors. If alarm is not acknowledged the value blinks. Default appearance for the value is a 32 bit float with two decimals in a field with transparent background and no border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. Alarm and warning colors and the process value engineering unit can be localized. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES
EngineeringUnit
Process value engineering unit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LPC_UnitText
Alarm UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledge state. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the value blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
4.6.8
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Numerical Entry Object description: Object is used to show and enter process value (the Value property) Object shows also the value's engineering unit as well as alarm and warning states with default colors. If alarm is not acknowledged the value blinks. Default appearance for the value is a 32 bit float with two decimals in a field with white background and Inset line style (Style property in the Line Tab). In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 85
Alarm and warning colors and the process value engineering unit can be localized. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.SET
EngineeringUnit
Process value engineering unit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LPC_UnitText
Limits
Note! If you use constant values as limits, the value type must be: float, double, integer or longinteger.
UpperLimit (+)
Process value entry upper limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
LowerLimit (+)
Process value entry lower limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
Colors Fill
Value background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Value color.
Alarm UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledge state. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the value blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Task TaskSource (+) TaskDestination (+)
4.6.9
These properties only appear if you select Task on the Behaviors Tab. (See also Task Tab.)
Text Output Object description: Shows text (String data type). Default appearance is text in a field with transparent background and no border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. The text can be localized. Note! If variable text (such as time stamp) is displayed continually in the display object, remove the Localization selection. Otherwise the localization database size limit can exceed.
8 - 86 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
General Value (+)
Text (String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.10 Conditional Text Output Object description: Shows text (String data type) conditionally controlled by the Visible property. Default appearance is text in a field with yellow background and black border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. The text can be localized. Note! If variable text (such as time stamp) is displayed continually in the display object, remove the Localization selection. Otherwise the localization database size limit can exceed. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Text (String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Visible (+)
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = Text visible. False (or 0) = Text not visible. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Fill
Text background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Text color.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.11 Text Entry Object description: Object is used to show and enter text (Value property). Default appearance is text in the field with white background and Inset line style (Style property in the Line Tab) In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 87
The text can be localized. Note! If variable text (such as time stamp) is displayed continually in the display object, do not select Localization. Otherwise the localization database size limit can exceed. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Text (String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Fill
Text background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Text color.
Task TaskSource (+) TaskDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Task on the Behaviors Tab. (See also Task Tab.)
4.6.12 Entry Object description: Object is used to enter (Value property). The characters are shown as asterisks (****). Default appearance is black asterisk characters in a field with white background and Inset line style (Style property in the Line Tab) In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. Property
Description
General Value (+)
(String data type). Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Fill
Text background color. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Text
Text color
Task TaskSource (+) TaskDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Task on the Behaviors Tab. (See also Task Tab.)
4.6.13 Signal Controlled Text Object description: Shows text (Text property) and blinking text (BlinkText property) controlled by a signal (Blink property). Default appearance is text in a field with transparent background and no border line. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. The text and blinking text can be localized. 8 - 88 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
General Text
Text shown in normal state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
BlinkText
Text shown in blinking state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
TextIndex
Index for the Text and BlinkText properties when they are vectors.
Colors Fill
Backround color shown in normal state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
BlinkFill
Backround color shown in blinking state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
FillIndex
Index for the Fill and BlinkFill properties when they are vectors.
Font
Text font color shown in normal state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
BlinkFont
Text font color shown in blinking state. Vector can also be used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
FontIndex
Index for the Font and BlinkFont properties when they are vectors.
Blink Blink
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = Blink on. False (or 0) = Blink off. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.14 Bar Object description: Shows a process value by means of bar or pointer indicator inside the field. The direction how the indicator moves (bottom to top or left to right) and the indicator type (bar or pointer) are defined in the Details Tab. Default appearance is the bar type indicator in a field, which bottom edge represents the lower limit of the process value and the top edge represents the upper limit of the process value. It is possible to define upper and lower warning limits and upper and lower alarm limit for the process value. In case the process value is outside the warning or alarm limit the object shows the indicator with the default warning/alarm color. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 89
Alarm and warning colors can be localized. Property
Description
General BarValue (+)
The bar value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES
Limits ValueUpperLimit (+)
Upper limit of the BarValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
ValueLowerLimit (+)
Lower limit of the BarValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
Alarm UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Colors BarColor
The color of the bar. If not defined, the default LevelFillColor (in the Colors Tab) will be used.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.15 PistonBar Object description: Shows two process values (BarValue and PistonValue) graphically overlapping. The PistonValue indicator starts always from the "top" of the BarValue indicator and grows to the opposite direction. This means that if the BarValue changes, the origin of the PistonValue changes too. In this example picture (where the scale is added by using the Static Textbox object) the BarValue is 70 and the PistonValue is 50. The ValueUpperLimit of the values is 100. The direction of the BarValue (bottom to top or left to right), and the PistonValue's indicator type (bar or pointer) are defined in the Details Tab. The upper and lower limits for the BarValue and PistonValue are defined by using the properties ValueUpperLimit and ValueLower. It is possible to define upper and lower alarm limits and upper and lower warning limit for the values as well. In case the value is outside the warning or alarm limit the object shows the indicator with the default warning/alarm color. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added to the object. 8 - 90 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Alarm and warning colors can be localized. Property
Description
General BarValue (+)
The bar value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES
PistonValue (+)
The piston value.
Limits ValueUpperLimit(+)
Upper limit for the BarValue and PistonValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
ValueLowerLimit(+)
Lower limit of the BarValue and PistonValue. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
Alarm UpperAlarm
Bar upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Bar lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Bar upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Bar lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
PistonAlarm PSUpperAlarm
Piston upper alarm limit.
PSLowerAlarm
Piston lower alarm limit.
PSUpperWarning
Piston upper warning limit.
PSLowerWarning
Piston lower warning limit.
Colors BarColor
The color of the bar. If not defined, the default LevelFillColor will be used.
PistonColor
The color of the piston. If not defined, the default FillColor will be used.
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.16 Profile For more detailed descriptions of Profile object properties see section 4.18 Profile object Design Guide. Property
Description
Series_1 ValueArray1
The array that provides the process data values to the series 1 (curve 1)
ColorArray1
The array that provides the colors for the process data values of the series 1.
FirstIndex1 LastIndex1
The number of values that belong to the series 1. Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values that belong to the series 1.
FirstVisible1
The number of values that are shown by the series 1.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 91
Property
Description
LastVisible1
Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values to be shown.
ScaleMinimum1
The X-axis scale. Enter the desired minimum and maximum values. Use the Scale properties in the Series Tab to complete the definition of X-axis scale. Note! If you do not define the ScaleMinimum and ScaleMaximum properties, the X-axis scale is the scale of the series that has most values.
ScaleMaximum1
UpperAlarmLimit1 UpperWarningLimit1 LowerWarningLimit1 LowerAlarmLimit1
Limits that observe values, which exceed or fall below a warning or alarm level. If the limits are connected, they are shown as horizontal lines over the profile object. The values exceeding or falling below limits are shown with separate colors. Note! Each series has its own limits.
ComparisonLevel1
Use this property to define the level on which the Xaxis is drawn, if you are defining a series with twosided plot (the PlotMethod property is True). This property has no meaning, if you are defining a series with one-sided plot (the PlotMethod property is False).
PlotMethod1
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = two sided plot. False (or 0) = one-sided plot.
Series_2
See Series_1
Series_3
See Series_1
Series_4
See Series_1
Series_5
See Series_1
Series_6
See Series_1
General Direction
Drawing direction for all the series of the object. This property cannot be set independently for each series. True (or an integer not equal to 0) = the series are drawn from right to left. False (or 0) = the series are drawn from left to right.
4.6.17 Table For more detailed descriptions of Table object properties see section 4.19 Table object Design Guide. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Data vector of the table.
Visibility
Data visibility vector. Index value = True (or an integer not equal to 0) => Corresponding data visible. Index value = False (or 0) => Corresponding data not visible.
RowCount (+)
Number of rows in the table.
ColCount (+)
Number of columns in the table.
Limits ValueUpperLimit ValueLowerLimit 8 - 92 • PMD Object Properties
Data entry upper and lower limits. Significant only if the property Lock values in this Spread is unchecked in the Settings Tab. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Appearance BackGColor
Table background color.
ForeColor
Table text color.
Headers ColumnHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?A?B?C?D?E?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between column headers.
RowHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?1?2?3?4?5?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between row headers.
Vector FirstElementIndex (+)
The first index of the data vector to be shown in the table.
NumberOfElements (+)
Number of consecutive indexes shown.
NumberOfModulo (+)
Number of consecutive indexes not shown.
CharsFromVector
Number of characters shown in each index (string data type).
4.6.18 Mode Object description: Outputs the mode (Manual, Automatic, Computer, Cascade or Service) of the tag block (point). The mode is presented as a text. The visibility of the object can be controlled by the HideMode property. In addition the behaviors available in the Behaviors Tab can be added for the object. Mode texts can be localized. Property
Description
General HideMode
Object hiding (boolean). HideMode = 0 (false) =>Object visible HideMode = 1 (true) =>Object not visible
Modes MDEMode
Mode control. MDEMode = 0 => Manual mode MDEMode = 1 => Automatic mode
CMMMode
Mode control. CMMMode = 1 => Computer mode
CSMMode
Mode control. CSMMode = 1 => Cascade mode
SERMode
Mode control. SERMode = 1 => Service mode
ModeTexts Manual
Manual mode text
Automatic
Automatic mode text
Computer
Computer mode text
Cascade
Cascade mode text
Service
Service mode text
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 93
Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.19 One-way Motor or One-way Motor (Pump) Objects' descriptions: The One-way Motor object outputs a one-way motor symbol and the One-way Motor (Pump) object outputs a pump symbol. The states of the motor/pump are shown by different colors; as default the stop state color is white, run state color is green, information state color is yellow and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General Run (+)
Running information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.RNG
Information
Project specific information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.INF
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.20 Two-way Motor or Two-speed Motor Objects' descriptions: The Two-way Motor object outputs a two-way motor symbol where the arrowhead beside the symbol indicates the current motor run direction. The Two-speed Motor object outputs a two-speed motor symbol where the number 1 or 2 beside the symbol indicates the current motor run speed. The states of the motors are shown by different colors; as default the stop state color is white, run state color is green, information state color is yellow and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized.
8 - 94 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General Run 1 (+)
Running direction/speed 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.RN1
Run 2 (+)
Running direction/speed 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.RN2
Information
Project specific information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.INF
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.21 Valve Object description: The Valve object outputs an open/closed valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different colors; as default the close state color is white, open state color is green, "between" state color is yellow, "both on" state color is purple and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
Control Open (+)
Open limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
Closed (+)
Closed limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 95
Property
Description
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.22 Three-way Valve Object description: The Three-way Valve object outputs a three-way valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different system defined colors; as default the alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General Control (+)
Control state limit data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
Idle (+)
Idle state limit data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.23 Vertical Spindle Valve or Motor Valve Objects' descriptions: The Vertical Spindle Valve object outputs a symbol for a vertical spindle valve and Motor Valve object outputs a symbol for a motor valve. The states of the valves are shown by different colors; as default the close state color is white, open state color is green, "between" state color is yellow, "both on" state color is purple and alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. 8 - 96 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Control Open
Open limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
Closed
Closed limit switch state. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
Value Value (+) UpperLimit (+)
These properties only appear if you select Level Fill on the Behaviors Tab.
LowerLimit (+)
4.6.24 Device Control 2/2 Object description: Device Control 2/2 object outputs a 2/2 hydraulic directional valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different colors; as default the alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General State1 (+)
Limit data 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSO
State2 (+)
Limit data 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSC
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+) Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab. PMD Object Properties • 8 - 97
4.6.25 Device Control 3/4 Object description: Device Control 3/4 object displays a 3/4 hydraulic directional valve symbol. The states of the valve are shown by different colors; as default the alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the colors can be localized. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
General State1 (+)
Limit data 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS1
State2 (+)
Limit data 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS2
State3 (+)
Limit data 3. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LSM
Alarm Alarm
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.26 General Logic Object description: General Logic object displays a symbol for a logic control. The symbol indicates also alarms. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default for the objects. The other available behaviors can also be added for the objects. Property
Description
Alarm Alarm (+)
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR
Acknowledged (+)
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+) 8 - 98 • PMD Object Properties
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.27 Binary Object description: Binary object displays a symbol that can be used to display the states of one or two binary data items with desired colors. The colors are defined by using the properties Limit1Color0, Limit1Color1 and Limit2Color0, Limit2Color1. In the Behaviors Tab the Faceplate (FC data) behavior is selected as default for the objects. The other available behaviors can also be added to the objects. Property
Description
Control Limit1 (+)
Limit data 1. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS1
Limit2 (+)
Limit data 2. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LS2
Limit1Color0 (+)
The color when Limit1 = false. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO1. See also 3.18.3 Defining colors by using constants.
Limit1Color1 (+)
The color when Limit1 = true. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO2
Limit2Color0 (+)
The color when Limit2 = false. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO3
Limit2Color1 (+)
The color when Limit2 = true. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.CO4
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.28 Binary Button Object description: Object creates a push button, which the can press in the interface to change the signal state from 0 to 1 and vice versa. As default the button's alarm state color is red. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol blinks. If required, the texts and colors can be localized. Property
Description
Signal Signal (+)
The signal (0/1) data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Colors Signal0Color
The color of the push button as the signal state is 0.
Signal1Color
The color of the push button as the signal state is 1.
Texts Signal0Text
The text in the push button as the signal state is 0.
Signal1Text
The text in the push button as the signal state is 1.
Alarm Alarm
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Alarm information. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.ALR PMD Object Properties • 8 - 99
Acknowledged
Alarm acknowledged. If not acknowledged and the alarm state is on the symbol blinks. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.OKS
4.6.29 Signal Button Object description: Object creates a push button, which the can press in the interface (Station) to "feed" the state 1 to the signal. The signal state is 1 as long as the keeps the push button depressed. As the releases the push button the signal state returns to 0. The description text can be localized. Property
Description
General Signal (+)
The signal (0/1) data. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Text Text
The description text in the push button
4.6.30 Checkbox (FC data) Object description: Displays a checkbox that the can use to select or deselect an option in the interface (Station). Default appearance is a checkbox with a label text on its right side with transparent background color and no borderlines. The label text is defined in the Details Tab. Property
Description
General Value
Process value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.31 Combobox (FC data) Object description: Displays a combobox, which is used in the interface (Station) to select the proper option as required. The options to be shown in the combobox can be localized. Property
Description
General
8 - 100 • PMD Object Properties
Items (+)
Options to be shown in the combobox. Typically a data vector is used. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.PIN
SelectedItem (+)
The index of the property that is selected from the list and sent to the system.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.6.32 Insert ActiveX Document See also 3.22 Inserting an ActiveX Document. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.33 Insert Picture from file See also 3.20 Inserting a Graphic. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.34 Insert Shape from File See also chapters 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence and 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.35 Insert ActiveX Control See also 3.23 Inserting an ActiveX Control. Property
Description
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
4.6.36 Alphanumeric (FC data) Note! Alphanumeric (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar. Property
Description
Value
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES)
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 101
4.6.37 Indicator (FC data) Note! Indicator (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar. Property
Description
Value
Process value. Example of data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MES)
UpperLimit
Process value entry upper limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MUL
LowerLimit
Process value entry lower limit value. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.MLL
UpperAlarm
Upper alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UAS
LowerAlarm
Lower alarm limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LAS
UpperWarning
Upper warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.UWS
LowerWarning
Lower warning limit. Typical data connection: PDS_BlockPin.DEPARTMENT.BLOCK.LWS
Signal SignalSource (+) SignalDestination (+)
4.7
These properties only appear if you select Toggle on the Behaviors Tab. For definition instructions see Toggle Tab.
PMD Blocks Tab You use the PMD Blocks tab to change the department name or the block names used in data connections of the selected objects. To change the block names you can use either the Replace or Rename function.
8 - 102 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Note! When you select the Rename function in the Task field, the New name field appears instead of the Replace and With fields.
4.7.1
Changing the department name for the data connections
Property
Description
Departments
In the Departments combobox select the department, which name you want to change. In the New department field write the new department name and press the Change department button. The new department name will be updated for the data connections of the object(s) in question. (The new department name replaces the old department name in the Departments combobox. The Blocks of the selected department list will be updated, because the new department may already have blocks defined.)
New department Change department
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 103
4.7.2
Changing (Replace) the block names for the data connections You can use the Replace function to replace one or several identical character strings by a new string and you can select one or several blocks as the target of the function.
8 - 104 • PMD Object Properties
Property
Description
Departments
In the Departments combobox select the department. (The Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field shows the block defined for the selected department.)
Blocks of the selected department
Use the Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field to select the block(s), which name(s) you want to replace. To select several successive blocks, hold the Shift key down and click the first and last block names you want to select. To select some separate blocks, hold the Ctrl key down and click the names of blocks you want to select.
Task
Select Replace
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Replace
In the Replace field write the character string to be replaced and in the With field write the character string that will replace.
With
Example 1 (See the previous picture). You want to replace the character string 03 with the string 05 in the end of all the block names. Select all the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write 03 in the Replace field and write 05 in the With field. Change blocks
Click Change blocks. The new names of blocks output to the New column in the right of the Blocks of the selected department field.
The new names are updated to the Old column when you - reselect the department - open another tab and then the PMD Blocks tab again - close and open the Properties window. Example 2. You want to add character A to the end of all the block names. Select all the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write 3 in the Replace field and write 3A in the With field. Example 3. You want to add new characters between the old characters. You want to change the block name CD1CON03 to CD15CON03. Select CD1CON03. Write 1 in the Replace field and write 15 in the With field. Example 4. You want to replace one character string in case there are several similar character strings in the block names. You want to change names CD2CON02 and MD2INP02 to CD3CON02 and MD3INP02. Select the original blocks. Because number 2 exists in two places, you have to write D2 in the Replace field and D3 in the With field. In other words, in this case it is not possible to define Replace = 2 and With = 3, because then also the latter number 2 will be replaced.
4.7.3
Changing (Rename) the block names for the data connections You can use the Rename function to rename one or several block names. Note! Block names must not contain question marks (?), because question mark is used as "wild card". Block names must not contain following URL characters either: +, /, ?, %, #, & and .(period).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 105
Property
Description
Departments
In the Departments combobox select the department, which contains the block names you want to rename. (The Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field shows the block defined for the selected department.).
Blocks of the selected department
Use the Old column in the left of the Blocks of the selected department field to select the block(s), which name(s) you want to rename. To select several successive blocks, hold the Shift key down and click the first and last block names you want to select. To select some separate blocks, hold the Ctrl key down and click the names of blocks you want to select.
Task
Select Rename
New name
If you selected only one block to be renamed, the block name appears to the New name field. Overwrite the old name with the new name in the New name field. Click Change blocks to rename the block. The new name outputs to the New column in the right of the Blocks of the selected department field.
Change blocks
If you selected several blocks to be renamed, the name of the first block appears to the New name field. Now use the question mark (?) as a wild card for all those characters you want to keep unchanged. Example 1 (See the previous picture). You want to rename the character string 03 with the string 05 in the end of all the block names. Select all the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write CD1???05 in the New name field. The question marks indicate that you want to keep characters 4-6 unchanged. Click Change blocks. The new names of blocks output to the New column in the right of the Blocks of the selected department field. 8 - 106 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
The new names are updated to the Old column when you - reselect the department - open another tab and then the PMD Blocks tab again - close and open the Properties window. Example 2. You want to add character 1 to the end of the block names STCONT3A and STMEAS3B. Select the blocks in the Blocks of the selected department field. Write ????????1 in the New name field.
4.8
Details Tab The Details tab contains properties that are specific to each type of object. The following chapters describe Detail tab object by object.
4.8.1
Static Pushbutton The details Tab is used to define the push button's appearance. Use the Behaviors Tab and the tab(s) related to the selected behavior(s) to define the function for the button.
4.8.2
Property
Description
Label
The push button’s label.
Background Image
The graphic that forms the push button’s background.
Action:
Not used in the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. None = Nothing.
Hyperlink The details Tab is used to define the URL (e.g. Web page) or display, which appears when the clicks the Hyperlink push button in the interface (Station).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 107
4.8.3
Property
Description
Action:
None = no link. Callup Page = Link to a display. When activated in the interface the object output the display, which name and directory path you give in the field next to. Callup URL = URL link. When activated in the interface the object output e.g. the Web page, which name and directory path you give in the field next to.
Numerical Output
Property
Description
Display as
Specifies the value data type that is shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.) Default appearance is a 32 bit float.
Boolean Integer (16bit or 32bit) Float (32bit or 64bit)
8 - 108 • PMD Object Properties
Number of decimals
The number of decimals that is shown. Default is two decimals.
Exponential format
If checked specifies that the value is shown in exponential format.
True text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is true.
False text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is false.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.8.4
Numerical Entry
Property
Description
Display as
Specifies the value data type that is shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.) Default appearance is a 32 bit float.
Boolean Integer (16bit or 32bit) Float (32bit or 64bit)
4.8.5
Number of decimals
The number of decimals that is shown. Default is two decimals.
Exponential format
If checked specifies that the value is shown in exponential format.
True text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is true.
False text
Used with the BOOLEAN data type. Specifies the text shown when the value is false.
Text Output
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 109
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Localization
Checked as default and has the following function: When the display, that contains this object, is opened in the interface (Station) for the first time, localization collects automatically all the data that can be localized and adds them to the localization database as text keys. After this the text keys can be translated in the database. Remove the selection, if you have no need to save data to the localization database.
4.8.6
Conditional Text Output
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
8 - 110 • PMD Object Properties
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Localization
Checked as default and has the following function: When the display, that contains this object, is opened in the interface (Station) for the first time, localization collects automatically all the data that can be localized and adds them to the localization database as text keys. After this the text keys can be translated in the database. Remove the selection, if you have no need to save data to the localization database.
4.8.7
Text Entry
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Localization
If checked the function is: Localization collects automatically texts that are entered to the system via this object and adds them to the localization database as text keys. After this the text keys can be translated in the database.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 111
4.8.8
Entry
Property
Description
Display as Text
Specifies that the value data type is text when shown in the interface. (The value is defined in the Data Tab.)
Fixed number of characters
If checked the text length shown in the interface can be defined in the Number of characters field. If not checked the text length is same as the number of characters in the value.
4.8.9
Number of characters
Specifies the number of characters that is shown.
Word wrap
If checked the text wraps to the next line and a hyphen occurs if necessary.
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated.
Bar
Bar - value indicator is shown as a bar. Pointer - value indicator is shown as a pointer. Direction
8 - 112 • PMD Object Properties
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.8.10 PistonBar
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated. Bar - value indicator is shown as a bar. Pointer - value indicator is shown as a pointer.
Direction
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
4.8.11 Checkbox (FC data)
Property
Description
Label
The descriptive text that appears to the right of the checkbox.
Use inverse logic
Reverses the standard checkbox logic, so that it corresponds to the wording of Label. (In standard logic, checked equals "1".) For example, labeling a checkbox "Open" would require the opposite logic to labeling it "Close".
4.8.12 Insert ActiveX Document
Property
Description
File Name
The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the document that you want to display. If necessary, find the document by clicking the Browse button. See also 3.24 URL Formats.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 113
4.8.13 Insert Picture from File
Property
Description
Image file
If necessary, find the image file by clicking the Browse button.
4.8.14 Insert Shape from File
Property
Description
Shape file
If necessary, find the shape file by clicking the Browse button.
Display shape
Display element that is shown when the display, that contains this object, is called up in the interface (Station). This property is used only for Shape Sequences and the default selection is the first display shape.
4.8.15 Alphanumeric (FC data) Note! Alphanumeric (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar.
8 - 114 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Display as Details
These properties specify how the block.pin (point parameter) information is displayed. See the next table "Display As option / Description".
Number of characters displayed
The maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
Display As option
Description
Numeric
Displays the value as a number. If you deselect Floating decimal point, you must type the number of decimals you want to display in Number of decimals.
State descriptor
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable to a status point. Displays the state descriptor corresponding to the point’s status.
Text
Displays the value as text
Acronym
Not ed by the PMD system. Displays an acronym that corresponds to the (integer) value of the point parameter.
Time
Applicable if the value represents time. If the value is an integer, then it is assumed to represent minutes after midnight. If it is a real number, it is assumed to represent seconds after midnight. Specify the number of characters you want to display in Decimals.
Date
Applicable if the value is a date in Julian format.
Date/Time
Applicable if the value represents date and time.
Hexadecimal
Applicable if you want to display the value in hexadecimal format.
Source Address
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a source address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Destination Address
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a destination address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Parameter of given point
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a point number in a file. Select the parameter you want to display from the field opposite.
State descriptor of point at word
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a state descriptor of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Parameter name of point at word
Not ed by the PMD system. Applicable if the value is a parameter name of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 115
4.8.16 Indicator (FC data) Note! Indicator (FC data) button is located on the Toolbox toolbar.
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated. Bar - value indicator is shown as a bar. Pointer - value indicator is shown as a pointer.
Direction
4.9
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
Entry Tab The Entry Tab appears for the following objects: Numerical Entry, Text Entry, Entry, Binary Button and Signal Button. In addition the Entry Tab appears for an object in case if you first select the Toggle behavior in the Behaviors Tab and you then select the Acknowledge property in the Toggle Tab. That is to say, if you want to connect the Toggle behavior (send a signal status from source to destination) to an object so that the function must be acknowledged before the send.
8 - 116 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Description
Text is shown as advice for the data entry (Numerical Entry, Text Entry, Entry), when the entry dialog box is opened in the interface.
Description 2
Used only in case of Binary Button or Signal Button or Toggle behavior.
Description 3
Used only in case of Binary Button or Signal Button or Toggle behavior.
Data entry page name
Data entry dialog html page name. Defaults (that shouldn’t be changed without a special reason) are: Numerical Entry - AcknowledgeDE.htm Text Entry - AcknowledgeDE.htm Entry - AcknowledgePW.htm Binary Button - AcknowledgeToggle.htm Signal Button - AcknowledgeSB.htm Toggle behavior - AcknowledgeToggle.htm
4.10 Font Tab The font tab controls the appearance of the object’s text, such as the font and point size.
Property
Description
Font
Text is displayed in the selected font. Note! You should select fonts with care, and only use fonts that are suitable for computer displays.
Size
The text size, expressed in points.
Alignment
Left, right center and justify align the text within the object.
Effects
Bold and Italic apply these text styles to the text. Underline draws a line under the text (example). Strikeout draws a line through the text (example).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 117
4.11 General Tab The General tab controls the object’s basic properties as its position and size.
Property
Description
Name
The object’s name. You use this name when referring to the object in scripts.
ToolTip
The text that appears when someone hovers the mouse pointer over the object in the interface (Station).
Left Top Width Height
The object’s position and size, expressed in pixels.
Rotation
Angle specifies the clockwise angle through which the object is rotated. If Angle is grayed out, it indicates that the object cannot be rotated.
Visibility
The object’s visibility setting in Station. The values are: Hidden. The object is always hidden. Visible. The object is always visible. Inherit. The object’s visibility is determined by its parent. For example, if an object is part of a group, setting the visibility of the group will apply the same setting to the object. Tip! An invisible object can be used as a placeholder for a working value (such as the PV of a point), so that the value can be accessed by a script.
Style
The style applied to the object. The style is one of the styles defined in the style sheet attached to the display.
Enable tab stop
Allows s to select the object by pressing TAB. The integer number you type in Tab index field specifies the order in which objects are selected — tabbing starts with the lowest number and ends with the highest.
Tab index
8 - 118 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.12 Lines Tab The Lines tab controls the object’s line thickness and style.
Property
Description
Width
The width of the line. Options are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, tai 8 pixels
Style
The line’s style. For detailed descriptions of the style options see the separate table below this table.
Arrows
Only applicable for Static Line, Static Polyline and Static Bezier Curve objects, which have the line start and end. Begin style specifies the type of “arrow” at the start and End style specifies the type of “arrow” at the end.
Corners
Only available for the Rounded Rectangle object. Roundness (0-100) specifies the corners of the rectangle. 0 is a sharpcornered and 100 is a round-cornered rectangle.
Objects
Descriptions for line style options
Static Rectangle Static Rounded Rectangle Static Oval Static Line Static Polyline Static Bezier Curve Static Arc Static Wedge Static Textbox Filled Rectangle Filled Oval Filled Polygon
Selectable style options are:
Static Pushbutton Blinking Rectangle Numerical Output Numerical Entry Text Output Conditional Text Output Text Entry Entry Signal Controlled Text Bar PistonBar Mode General Logic Binary Button Signal Button Combobox (FC data)
Selectable style options are:
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
None - no border line Solid
Inset
Outset
Ridge
Groove
Dotted
Dashed
Double
Note, that some styles can be seen clearly only if you use some of the thicker line widths (4, 6 or 8 pixels).
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 119
4.13 Link Tab The Link Tab provides you to connect a display request to the object. The Link Tab only appears if the Display Link behavior is checked in the Behaviors Tab.
Property
Description
Display link name
The filename of the display that appears when a clicks on the object. The default folder is Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract.
4.14 Popup Tab This tab only appears if you select Popup on the Behaviors Tab.
Property
Description
File Name
The file name of the popup display that appears when a clicks on the object.
Initial Position
Determines the initial position of the popup when it is called up. Select Determine automatically if you want Station to determine the initial position near the object. Select Position on parent display if you want to specify the top-left corner coordinates of the popup. You can either type the Left and Top coordinates, or click Set Position and then click in the display to mark the position.
8 - 120 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.15 Signal Tab The Signal Tab only appears for the Signal Button object.
Property
Description
Signal interval between sendings (msecs)
Interval (milliseconds) after which the signal will be resend while the pulse activation button is depressed.
4.16 Task Tab The Task Tab is only applicable to the Numerical Entry, Text Entry and Entry objects. The Task Tab appears if you check the Task behavior on the Behaviors Tab of the object.
Property
Description
Invert
When unchecked, the source value (TaskSource property in the Data Tab) is set to destination (TaskDestination property in the Data Tab). When checked, you use the Invert Values fields to define the values to be sent to the destination.
Invert Values
If the source value (TaskSource property in the Data Tab) is 0 then the value in the field Invert Value 0 is set to the destination (TaskDestination property in the Data Tab). If the source value (TaskSource property in the Data Tab) is 1 then the value in the field Invert Value 1 is set to the destination (TaskDestination property in the Data Tab).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 121
4.17 Toggle Tab The Toggle behavior allows you to send signal status from the source to destination. The Toggle Tab appears only if you select the Toggle behavior on the Behaviors Tab of the object. You use the Toggle Tab to define the value to be sent to the destination and if the function must be acknowledged or not.
Property
Description
Acknowledge
If checked the value change must be acknowledged. Adds the Entry Tab, which you use to define the acknowledgement. Note! You must deselect the Acknowledge property (to remove the Entry Tab), before you deselect the Toggle behavior in the Behaviors tab.
Source and Destination
When the least significant bit of Source (SignalSource property in the PMD Data tab) is 0 then the value you define into the upper Destination field is set to the destination (SignalDestination property in the PMD Data tab). When the least significant bit of Source (SignalSource property in the PMD Data tab) is 1 then the value you define into the lower Destination field is set to the destination (SignalDestination property in the PMD Data tab).
4.18 Profile object Design Guide The purpose of this section is to instruct application designers how to create and modify Profile objects.
4.18.1 General Tab In the General Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Profile object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.11 General Tab.
4.18.2 PMD Data Tab In the PMD Data Tab there are both common and Profile object specific properties.
8 - 122 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Properties in the Parameters field are common to all objects. If you need instructions how to make a process data (block.pin) connection or what are the data types, see section 4.6 PMD Data Tab. In the following are descriptions for the Table object specific properties. Property
Description
Series_1 ValueArray1
The array that provides the process data values to the series 1 (curve 1)
ColorArray1
The array that provides the colors for the process data values of the series 1.
FirstIndex1
The number of values that belong to the series 1. Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values that belong to the series 1.
LastIndex1 FirstVisible1 LastVisible1 ScaleMinimum1 ScaleMaximum1
UpperAlarmLimit1 UpperWarningLimit1 LowerWarningLimit1 LowerAlarmLimit1
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The number of values that are shown by the series 1. Enter the desired indexes of the ValueArray to define the range of values to be shown. The X-axis scale. Enter the desired minimum and maximum values. Use the Scale properties in the Series Tab to complete the definition of X-axis scale. Note! If you do not define the ScaleMinimum and ScaleMaximum properties, the X-axis scale is the scale of the series that has most values. Limits that observe values, which exceed or fall below a warning or alarm level. If the limits are connected, they are shown as horizontal lines over the profile object. The values exceeding or falling below limits are shown with separate colors. Note! Each series has its own limits.
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 123
Property
Description
ComparisonLevel1
Use this property to define the level on which the Xaxis is drawn, if you are defining a series with twosided plot (the PlotMethod property is True). This property has no meaning, if you are defining a series with one-sided plot (the PlotMethod property is False).
PlotMethod1
True (or an integer not equal to 0) = two sided plot. False (or 0) = one-sided plot.
Series_2
See Series_1
Series_3
See Series_1
Series_4
See Series_1
Series_5
See Series_1
Series_6
See Series_1
General Direction
Drawing direction for all the series of the object. This property cannot be set independently for each series. True (or an integer not equal to 0) = the series are drawn from right to left. False (or 0) = the series are drawn from left to right.
4.18.3 PMD Blocks Tab In the PMD Blocks Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Profile object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.7 PMD Blocks Tab.
8 - 124 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.18.4 Series Tab On the series tab you can add, remove and customize series (Series 1 – Series 6) in a Profile object.
Property
Description
Add
Adds a new tab (Series 1 – Series 6), which you then use to define the type and other properties of the series. Note! You must define own tab for each of the series (Series_1 – Series_6) defined in the PMD Data Tab.
Remove
Removes a selected tab from the Series Tab.
Title
The title of the series. The titles of series are shown in the profile legend, if you select the option Series Names as the Legend Style property in the Legend Tab.
Type
Series type. The options are: Line – Color Array Area Bar -
Color
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Color of a series. This property has no effect, if you use the property Color Each (for Area and Bar types) or if you use the ColorArray property in the PMD Data Tab to define the colors of data points. PMD Object Properties • 8 - 125
Property
Description
Color Each
Only available for Area and Bar types. Colors each data point of the series with a different color. This property has no effect, if you use the ColorArray property in the Data Tab to define the colors of data points.
Border Visible
Visibility of borders in a series. Note! The Line type series disappears, if you uncheck this property.
Show in Legend
Shows a series information in the profile legend. Use the Legend Tab to define the information in detail.
Side Margins
Only available for Bar type. Side margins of a series within the back wall.
Stairs
Only available for Line and Area types. Shows the data as stairs.
Visible
Visibility of the series.
Multiple Series
Only available for Area and Bar types. Defines the mutual position of multiple series. None – Series are drawn one on the other on the Z-axis. Side - Data points of (Bar type) series are drawn next to each other’s on the X-axis. Stacked - Series are drawn one on the other on the Yaxis. Stacked 100% - Series are drawn one on the other on the Y-axis by using the total profile area.
Scale
The X-axis scale. (See also the ScaleMinimum and ScaleMaximum properties in PMD Data Tab.) Visible – when checked the X-axis scale is visible. Values format: - for example 0.0 = the values are shown with one decimal. Increment – for example 2 = every second value in the Xaxis scale are shown.
Bar Width
Only available for Bar type. Defines the width of bars.
4.18.5 Title Tab You use the Title Tab to define the name and its properties for a Profile object.
8 - 126 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Caption
Title of the profile.
Visible
When checked, the title is visible.
Alignment
Alignment of the title: The title can be placed to the Left, Center or Right on top of profile.
Background Color
Background color of the title: Transparent – Check this to override the background color and set it to transparent. Change - Uncheck Transparent and select the background color.
Font
Font of the title.
4.18.6 Legend Tab On the Legend Tab, you can customize the legend of the profile. The legend shows the titles of series, for example.
Property
Description
Visible
When checked, the legend is visible.
Alignment
Alignment of the legend. The legend can be placed to the Left, Right, Top or Bottom of the profile .
Font
Font of the text shown in the legend.
Background Color
Background color of the legend.
Legend Style
The data shown in the legend: Automatic Series Names Series Values Last Values
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 127
Property
Description
Text Style
The format of the text shown in the legend. This property has meaning only if Legend Style is Series Values or Last Values. The options are: Plain Left Value Right Value Left Percent Right Percent X Value
4.18.7 Tab You use the Tab to define the Profile object’s border and background properties.
8 - 128 • PMD Object Properties
Property
Description
Bevel Inner
Type of the inner bevel (frame): None, Lowered or Raised
Bevel Outer
Type of the outer bevel (frame): None, Lowered or Raised.
Width
Bevel – Width of the inner and outer bevel in pixels. Offset - Width of the space between the inner and outer bevel in pixels.
Gradient Direction
Direction from gradient start color to end color: Top Bottom, Bottom Top, Left Right, Right Left, From Center, From Top Left or From Bottom Left.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Margin (%)
Left margin between the profile and inner bevel. Right margin between the profile and inner bevel. Top margin between the profile and inner bevel. Bottom margin between the profile and inner bevel.
Gradient
The can be colored using two different colors. Visible – Sets the gradient color in use. Start Color - Gradient start color. End Color - Gradient end color. The use of Back property overrides the Gradient.
Background Image
Browse – Opens a dialog box, which you use to browse a background image for the profile. You can enter a file name with or without its path. If the whole path is not entered, the background image is searched for in the directory in which the display file is saved. The following picture formats are ed: bmp, jpg, jpeg, ico, wmf, and emf. If you set a background image it overrides the Gradient property.
4.18.8 Left Axis Tab / Bottom Axis Tab The following picture shows the meaning of properties available to customize the axes of a profile.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 129
Property
Description
Title
Caption – Title of the axis. Angle - The angle of the title. Can be set within the range of 0° to 360°. The default value is 0° for the bottom axis and 90° for the left axis. Font - Font of the axis title.
Labels
Visible - Sets the label visible. Font - Font of values shown in the label. Value Format – Format of values shown in the label. The default setting shows the values as integers. If you enter 0.0, the values are shown with one decimal, etc. If you leave the field empty no values are shown.
Grid Border
Visible - Sets the grid visible. Color – Color of the grid.
Grid Border Style
Style of the gridlines. Line type options are: Solid, Dash, Dot, Dash Dot, Dash Dot Dot or Small Dots.
Visible
Sets the axe visible.
4.18.9 Walls Tab You use the Walls Tab to customize the back wall color of the profile. The back wall is the area within which a series are drawn.
8 - 130 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Back Wall
Check the Transparent to leave the profile background transparent or uncheck the Transparent and click Color to select the desired color.
4.18.10 Selectors Tab You use the Selectors Tab to customize the left and right selectors of the profile. Selectors are the vertical indicator lines, which you can use to specify profile data.
Property
Description
Color
Left - Color of the left selector. Right - Color of the right selector.
Visible
Left - Sets the left selector visible. Right - Sets the right selector visible.
Width
Width of the selectors.
4.19 Table object Design Guide The purpose of this chapter is to instruct application designers how to create and modify Table objects.
4.19.1 General Tab In the General Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Table object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.11 General Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 131
4.19.2 PMD Data Tab In the PMD Data Tab there are both common and Table object specific properties.
Properties in the Parameters field are common to all objects. If you need instructions how to make a process data (block.pin) connection or what are the data types, see section 4.6 PMD Data Tab.
8 - 132 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the following are descriptions for the Table object specific properties and some definition examples. Property
Description
General Value (+)
Incoming data for the table.
Decimals
When valueformat is numerical, number of decimals.
Visibility
Data visibility vector. Index value = True (or an integer not equal to 0) => Corresponding data visible. Index value = False (or 0) => Corresponding data not visible.
RowCount (+)
Number of rows in the table.
ColCount (+)
Number of columns in the table.
Limits ValueUpperLimit ValueLowerLimit
Data entry upper and lower limits. Significant only if the property Lock values in this Spread is unchecked in the Settings Tab.
Appearance BackGColor
Table background color.
ForeColor
Table text color.
Headers ColumnHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?sarr?A?B?C?D?E?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between column headers.
RowHeaderText
Vector or constant string. Example of a constant string: ?sarr?1?2?3?4?5?. i.e. the ? is used as separator between row headers.
Vector FirstElementIndex (+)
The first index of the data vector to be shown in the table. See examples below.
NumberOfElements (+)
Number of consecutive indexes shown. See examples below.
NumberOfModulo (+)
Number of consecutive indexes not shown. See examples below.
CharsFromVector
Number of characters shown in each index (string data type). See example below.
Note! The final values that a Table object outputs are defined by using the following vector properties in the PMD Data Tab: FirstElementIndex (+), NumberOfElements (+), NumberOfModulo (+) and CharsFromVector (+). In the following there are some examples how to define vector properties.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 133
Example 1. Showing all the vector elements in a table This example tells how to show all the values (1 to 10) of the vector. FirstElementIndex:
Define 1, because all the vector elements are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfElements: (Number of successive table indexes)
Define 1 or any other number > 0, because all the vector elements are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfModulo: (Number of those successive table indexes that are not shown in the table)
Define 0, because all the vector elements are to be shown in the table.
CharsFromVector: (Number of characters shown in each index in case the of string data type)
NA because the data type is Number. (see section 4.19.5 Value Format Tab).
In the PMD Data Tab the definitions are as follows:
When you set the number of rows (RowCount property) to 2 and the number of columns (ColCount property) to 5, the table shown in the following picture will be output in the display.
Example 2. Showing part of the vector elements in a table This example tells how to show only part of the vector's elements in a table. Vector has values from 1 to 20. In the HMIWeb Display Builder the designer sets following values:
8 - 134 • PMD Object Properties
FirstElementIndex:
Define 4, because the first element to be shown in the table exists in the vector index 4.
NumberOfElements: (Number of successive table indexes)
Define 2, because always two successive vector elements are to be shown in the table. (i.e. The two first vector indexes used are 4 and 5)
NumberOfModulo: (Number of those successive table indexes that are not shown in the table)
Define 3, because always three successive vector elements after the used elements are left unread. (i.e. The indexes 6, 7 and 8 are not used, indexes 9 and 10 are used, indexes 11, 12 and 13 are not used, etc.)
CharsFromVector: (Number of characters shown in each index in case the of string data type)
NA because the data type is Number. (see section 4.19.5 Value Format Tab).
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
In the PMD Data Tab the definitions are as follows:
When you set the number of rows (RowCount property) to 1 and the number of columns (ColCount property) to 8, the table shown in the following picture will be output in the display.
Example 3. Showing text in a table This example instructs how to show texts (data type is String) in a table. Basic idea is the same than with numerical values, but now the designer has to define also the CharsFromVec property and the format of incoming text is a long string (while the format for numerical values is an array). i.e. one character in a string can be corresponds to one value in a numerical array. In this example the original text is a 16 characters long string. In the HMIWeb Display Builder the designer sets following values: FirstElementIndex:
Define 1, because all the characters of the string are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfElements: (Number of successive table indexes)
Define 1 or any other number > 0, because all the characters of the string are to be shown in the table.
NumberOfModulo: (Number of those successive table indexes that are not shown in the table)
Define 0, because all the characters of the string are to be shown in the table.
CharsFromVector: (Number of characters shown in each index in case the of string data type)
Define 2, because two characters are to be shown in each table cell.
In the PMD Data Tab the definitions are as follows:
When you set the number of rows (RowCount property) to 1 and the number of columns (ColCount property) to 8, the table shown in the following picture will be output in the display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 135
4.19.3 PMD Blocks Tab In the PMD Blocks Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Table object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.7 PMD Blocks Tab.
4.19.4 Font Tab In the Font Tab there isn’t any properties specific only to Table object, therefore if you need instructions see section 4.10 Font Tab.
4.19.5 Value Format Tab The Value Format Tab is used to define the data type in the table.
8 - 136 • PMD Object Properties
Property
Description
Number
This option allows you to show numerical type data in the table. You can also show data exponentially by selection the Show number exponentially property.
String
This option allows you to show string type data in the table.
Boolean
This option allows you to define the texts to be shown in the table when the boolean data type is true and false.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
4.19.6 Appearance Tab The Appearance Tab is used to define some details of appearance (layout).
Property
Description
Alignment
Use the Alignment taken from value format or align the values in the table cells to the Left, Center or Right.
Borders
Check the Show grid on table to get the grid visible. Uncheck to hide grid.
4.19.7 ColRow Tab The Columns/Rows (ColRow) Tab is used to define whether the headers are shown or not. If headers are shown, sizes of headers are defined here.
Property
Description
Headers
Select Show column headers, to get column headers visible. Uncheck to hide column headers. Use the ColumnHeaderText property in the PMD Data Tab to define the header texts. Select Show row headers, to get row headers visible. Uncheck to hide row headers. Use the RowHeaderText property in the PMD Data Tab to define the header texts.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
PMD Object Properties • 8 - 137
Property
Description
Header sizes
Set the Height of column headers and Width of row headers in pixels. These properties are significant only if you select the Show column headers and Show row headers properties in this same tab.
4.19.8 Settings Tab The Settings Tab is used to define some settings for table.
Property
Description
Lock values in this Spread
Check to prevent the data entry to the table cells.
Localization
Check Localize locked output strings to localize texts in cells of string data type. Check Localize headers if there is need to localize header texts. Check Localize True/False texts to localize texts shown in the table when the boolean data type is true and false.
Note! Table needs to be locked (data entry prevented) for localization to work.
Direction for setting the values to Spread.
Check the One row at the time to define that incoming data is set to table one row at the time, starting from first row. Defines also cursor to move horizontally from left to right. Check the One column at the time to define that incoming data is set to table one column at the time, starting from first column. Defines also cursor to move from top to bottom.
8 - 138 • PMD Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5
EPKS Object Properties
5.1
EPKS Object Properties – overview You access the properties of the selected object(s) through the Properties window. You can call up the Properties window for an object
5.2
•
by double-clicking the object.
•
by clicking the (Properties window) on the View toolbar. Note! Make sure the correct object is selected.
•
by right-clicking the object and selecting Edit Properties from the menu opened.
Animation Tab The animation tab specifies the correspondence between the object’s color and the value or status of the associated point parameter/database file. Property
Description
Color Breakpoints
The type of animation used for the object:
Indicate alarm state with color
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
•
None. No animation.
•
Continuous. The color changes as the value changes. You can specify up to nine colors and the percentage range for which each color applies. (For example, you could make an object turn red when the value is between 90 and 100 percent of its range.)
•
Discrete. Each color represents a particular discrete value. Select Inverse if you want to use the object's fill color — this produces a "reverse video" effect, which makes text stand out, providing you have selected an appropriate color scheme.
Station overrides the current color with the systemdefined colors during alarm states. (See the following table.)
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 139
Property
Description
Indicate off-scan state with color
Station overrides the current color with the systemdefined color for “off-scan”. (See the following table.)
Level fill animation
Only applicable to vector objects, such as ovals. The "level" of the object's fill color varies in accordance with a value in the database. Adds the Data Tab, which you use to specify the database details.
System Defined Colors
5.3
Point state
System defined color
In alarm and unacknowledged
Red and blinking
In alarm and acknowledged
Red
Returned to normal but alarm not acknowledged
Normal color, but blinking
Point off-scan (scanning disabled)
White
Behaviors Tab The Behaviors tab specifies which behaviors are attached to the object. When you select a behavior from the Behaviors tab, another tabs appear, which you then use to configure the behavior’s properties. For example, if you select Popup behavior, the Popup tab appears. The behavior list indicates which behaviors are available for the object. Description provides a brief description of the behavior. The following table describes the behaviors supplied with HMIWeb Display Builder. However, some other behaviors may also be supplied for specialized tasks and all these behaviors are not available for all the objects.
8 - 140 • EPKS Object Properties
Behavior
Description
Faceplate
A faceplate appears when a clicks the object. A faceplate is a specialized type of popup that shows critical information about the point. (In most cases, a faceplate looks like the lefthand portion of the associated point detail display.)
Hover
Only applicable to alphanumerics and comboboxes. If the object is too narrow to show its contents, the contents appears in a ToolTip (a small window) when a moves the mouse pointer over the object. Note: If you select this behavior, do not use the object's ToolTip property (General tab).
Popup
When selected this option allows the to call up a popup by clicking the object in Station. Adds the Popup Tab, which you use to configure the popup. For an introduction to popups, see 2.3 Creating a popup or faceplate.
Shape Sequence Animation
Only applicable to shape sequences. See 2.4 Creating a Shape Sequence.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
To define a behavior: 1. Select the object and click the Behaviors tab. 2. Select the behavior you want to define. 3. If any new tabs appear, select them and define the behavior’s properties. See instructions for the tab in question.
5.4
Colors Tab The Colors tab controls the object's colors. The number of color properties depends on the object's type. For example, a rectangle has line and fill colors, whereas an alphanumeric also has a text color. (The following table only describes the common properties.) Property
Description
Fill Color
The object's fill color.
Line Color
The object's line color.
Text Color
The text color. Only applicable to objects with text, such as alphanumerics and pushbuttons.
Level Fill Color
The color of the bar or pointer used to indicate the value. Only applicable to indicator objects.
Chart object specific properties
5.5
Property
Description
axisBackColor
The background color of the axes.
AxisLabelColor
The color of the axis labels.
AxisMarkerLabelColor
The color of the axis markers.
plotBackColor
The background color of the plot.
referenceLineColor
The color of the reference line.
Custom Properties Tab The Custom Properties Tab is only applicable to a dynamic shape that has been inserted into a display. For details about:
5.6
•
Custom properties, see 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
•
Filling in this tab, see 2.5.4 Inserting a Dynamic Shape into a Display.
Data Tab The Data tab specifies the object's link to the database. (For some types of objects, such as rectangles and circles, this tab only appears if you select Color Animation on the Behaviors Tab. The Type of database link property specifies the type of link: •
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Point/Parameter. The object is linked to a point parameter. See 5.6.1 Defining a Link To a Point. EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 141
•
5.6.1
Database file. The object is linked to a file in the server database, whose contents are controlled by another application. See 5.6.2 Defining a Link to a Database File.
Defining a Link To a Point Note! This function is not ed by the Experion PKS with PMD Control system. When defining a link to a point, you specify the point and the appropriate parameter. (Each point has a number of parameters associated with it, such as field values and configuration details. For details about points and their parameters, see the Server and Client Configuration Guide.) Property
Description
Point
The ID of the point to which the object is linked. If you are creating the display on a server, you can select the ID from the list. (However, in a DSA system, the server you are working on may not know of the existence of every point in the system.)
Parameter
The point parameter to which the object is linked. If you select a history parameter, such as H24H, History offset controls which history value is used. (0, the default, represents the latest history value, 1 represents the second-to-last value, and so on.)
Data entry allowed
If you select Data entry allowed, s with a security level equal to or higher than the specified Security Level can edit the object's value. The security levels are: Operator, Supervisor, Engineer and Manager.
Security level
5.6.2
Defining a Link to a Database File Note! This function is not ed by the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. For details about database files, see the Application Development Guide.
8 - 142 • EPKS Object Properties
Property
Description
File
The number of the file to which the object is linked. Select the indexing option from the list opposite: •
No indexing.
•
Indexed by file offset. Adds Station’s current file offset to the file number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the host and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Record
The number of the record within the file. Select the indexing option from the list opposite:
Word
No indexing.
•
Indexed by record offset. Adds Station’s current record offset to the record number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the server and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
•
Indexed by field offset. Adds Station’s current field offset to the word number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the server and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
•
Indexed by Station no. Each Station uses separate records in the file. The effect is to view the file as a series of logical files, one for each Station. Set the record and word numbers as normal; for example, if you want the link to refer to the second record for each Station, set Record to 2.
The word number within the file. Select the indexing option from the list opposite: •
No indexing.
•
Indexed by field offset. Adds Station’s current field offset to the word number. The offset can be set by scrollbars, by the server and by the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
Format
The data format. If you select String, you must specify the length of the string. If you select Bits, you must specify the starting bit and the number of bits within the word.
Read from oldest record of circular file
Applicable if it is a circular file and you want to read the oldest record first.
Data entry allowed
If you select Data entry allowed, s with a security level equal to or higher than the specified Security Level can edit the object's value. The security levels are: Operator, Supervisor, Engineer and Manager.
Security level
5.7
•
Data Tab (Alarm table) The Data tab controls what columns (alarm details) appear in the alarm table. Property
Description
Tick the columns you wish to show
Lists the available columns that can appear in the alarm table. Select the columns you want to appear in the table. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to specify the order in which columns appear in the table. (The first column in the list appears on the left of the table.)
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 143
Property
Description
Width
The width of the selected column. The way in which the width is interpreted depends on the setting for Column resizing (on the Details tab). If you set Column resizing to None or Standard, the width represents pixels. Note that if the sum of the column widths is greater than the width of the alarm table (Width on the General tab), you should enable horizontal scrollbars (set Horizontal scrollbar on the Details tab to visible). If you set Column resizing to Compact, the width is treated as proportional value, and the column widths are automatically adjusted to fit the table. For example, if a table is 450 pixels wide and you set the width of the first column to 100 and the width of the four other columns to 200, the width of the first column will be 50 pixels (one ninth of 450) and the width of each other column will be 100 pixels (2/9 of 450).
5.8
Details Tab The Details tab contains properties that are specific to each type of object.
5.8.1
5.8.2
ActiveX Document Property
Description
File Name
The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the document that you want to display. If necessary, find the document by clicking the Browse button. See also 3.24 URL Formats.
Property
Description
Alarm table Header Header height Visible
If Visible is selected, the table includes column headings. Header height specifies the height (in pixels) of the column headings.
Grid Row height
The height (in pixels) of the rows.
Scrollbars
8 - 144 • EPKS Object Properties
Vertical scrollbar
The vertical scrollbar's visibility setting. The values are: Hidden = the scrollbar is hidden Visible = the scrollbar is visible Auto = the scrollbar only appears if the table cannot simultaneously show all the alarms.
Horizontal scrollbar
The horizontal scrollbar's visibility setting. The values are: Hidden = the scrollbar is hidden Visible = the scrollbar is visible Auto = the scrollbar only appears if the table is narrower than total width of the columns.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Resizing
5.8.3
Column resizing
Specifies whether a can resize columns, and the way in which adjacent columns are resized: None = The columns cannot be resized Standard = Resizing a column makes the column to the right wider/narrower Compact = Resizing a column makes all columns to the right proportionally wider/narrower.
Date and time format
Specifies the date and time format. The formats are: Date and time = shows the date, and time to seconds Date and time (ms) = shows the date, and time to ms (If you don't want ms resolution, specify 1 or 2 decimal places.) Time = shows the time to seconds Time (ms) = shows the time to ms (If you don't want ms resolution, specify 1 or 2 decimal places.)
Alphanumeric Property
Description
Display as Details
These properties specify how the value is displayed. See the next table "Display As option / Description".
Word wrap
If selected, the value (normally text) is displayed over several lines if it is longer than the alphanumeric's width.
Number of characters displayed
The maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
Display As option
Description
Numeric
Displays the value as a number. If you deselect Floating decimal point, you must type the number of decimals you want to display in Number of decimals.
State Descriptor
Applicable to a status point. Displays the state descriptor associated with the current value.
Text
Applicable if the value is a text string.
Acronym
Displays the acronym associated with the current value (an integer) of the point parameter. See 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms.
Time
Applicable if the value represents time. If the value is an integer, then it is assumed to represent minutes after midnight. If it is a real number, it is assumed to represent seconds after midnight. Specify the number of characters you want to display in Decimals.
Date
Applicable if the value is a date in Julian format.
Date/Time
Applicable if the value date and time.
Hexadecimal
Applicable if you want to display the value in hexadecimal format.
Source Address
Applicable if the value is a source address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Destination Address
Applicable if the value is a destination address for a point. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 145
5.8.4
Display As option
Description
Parameter of given point
Applicable if the value is a point number in a file. Select the parameter you want to display from the field opposite.
State descriptor of point at word
Applicable if the value is a state descriptor of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Parameter name of point at word
Applicable if the value is a parameter name of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Chart You can simultaneously display the values of up to eight point parameters, depending on the type of chart selected in Chart type on the Options Tab. (Currently, the chart only s Line Trend, which allows you to have up to eight plots.)
5.8.5
5.8.6
Property
Description
Plot
The plot's ID. (Used in scripts to identify the plot.)
Point ID Parameter
The point parameter whose values you want to display.
Color
The color used to display the point parameter values on the chart.
Property
Description
Label
The descriptive text that appears to the right of the checkbox.
Use inverse logic
Reverses the standard checkbox logic, so that it corresponds to the wording of Label. (In standard logic, checked equals "1".) For example, labeling a checkbox "Open" would require the opposite logic to labeling it "Close".
Checkbox
Combobox
8 - 146 • EPKS Object Properties
Property
Description
Display as Details
Specifies how the object is animated. See the next table "Display As option/Description".
Sort alphabetically
Alphabetically sorts the items in the list.
Display As option
Description
State Descriptor
Displays the defined states of the selected point as entries in the combobox’s list.
Acronym
Displays an acronym that corresponds to the (integer) value of the point parameter. See 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.8.7
5.8.8
5.8.9
Display As option
Description
Parameter name of point at word
Only applicable if the value is a parameter name of a point in a file, with the Point ID at the word specified in the field opposite. This option is generally only used by Honeywell personnel.
Hyperlink Property
Description
Action
Calls up the specified object: Callup URL. Calls up the specified URL. Callup Page. Calls up the specified display (DSP or HMIWeb). Note that you do not have to specify the path because Station automatically searches its display folders. None. Does nothing.
Property
Description
Type
Specifies how the object is animated. Bar - A colored bar of variable height within the object indicates the relative value. Pointer - A colored pointer moves up and down within the object to indicate the relative value.
Direction
Specifies whether the indicator moves vertically or horizontally.
Property
Description
Label
The push button’s label.
Background Image
The graphic that forms the push button’s background.
Action, Details
The action performed when a clicks the push button. See the next table "Select this action/To do this".
Select this action:
To do this:
None
Nothing, or the button has a script that runs when it is clicked by a .
Callup Page
Call up the specified display or Web page. If you specify a Web page, you must ensure that it does not conflict with the Web access restrictions specified in Station.
Request Report
Request the specified report.
Indicator
Push button
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 147
Select this action:
To do this:
Request Task
Perform the task associated with the specified task LRN. In addition to specifying a task LRN, you must also specify: •
Appropriate values for the task parameters
•
The security level required to perform the task
For details about the Server Display Program (LRN 21), see Server and Client Configuration Guide. Menu Tag
Perform the menu command selected from the list of menu commands.
Launch Application
Launch the specified application. Either type the application’s name in Application, or click the button opposite to navigate through the folder structure and find the executable.
5.8.10 Shape Applicable to both shape sequences and dynamic shapes, whether embedded or linked.
5.9
Property
Description
Shape file
The shape file on which this shape is based. Readonly.
Display shape
Only applicable to a shape sequence. The shape that is initially displayed when the display is called up. By default, this is the first shape in the sequence.
Filters Tab The Filters tab is only applicable to alarm and event tables, and specifies what types of alarms/events appear in the table. Property
Description
Tick the columns you wish to filter by
Lists the alarm/event details (columns).
Filter
The properties that appear in this section depend on the currently selected column (alarm/event item). Configure the properties as appropriate. For example, if you only wanted to include unacknowledged alarms in the table, you would select the Alarm State Indication column, and then select Unacknowledged here. Note: You can filter by a column even if it does not appear in the table. (The Data tab specifies which columns are visible.) For example, you may want to filter out low and high priority alarms even though the Priority column is not visible.
8 - 148 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.10 Font Tab The font tab controls the appearance of the object's text, such as the font and point size. Property
Description
Font
Text is displayed in the selected font. Note that you should select fonts with care, and only use fonts that are suitable for computer displays.
Size
The text size, expressed in points. (If you want to specify a non-standard size, click the box and type the size — for example: 56.5pt — and then press ENTER.)
Style
The text style, such as italics.
Justify
The horizontal alignment of text within the object.
Effects
Strikeout draws a line through the text and Underline draws a line under it.
5.11 General Tab The General tab controls the object's basic properties such as its position and size. Property
Description
Name
The object’s name. You use this name when referring to the object in scripts.
ToolTip
The text that appears when someone hovers the mouse pointer over the object in Station.
Left Top Width Height
The object’s position and size, expressed in pixels.
Rotation
Angle specifies the clockwise angle through which the object is rotated. If Angle is grayed out, it indicates that the object cannot be rotated.
Visibility
The object’s visibility setting in Station. The values are: •
Hidden. The object is always hidden.
•
Visible. The object is always visible.
•
Inherit. The object’s visibility is determined by its parent. For example, if an object is part of a group, setting the visibility of the group will apply the same setting to the object.
Tip! An invisible object can be used as a placeholder for a working value (such as the PV of a point), so that the value can be accessed by a script. Enable tab stop Tab index
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Allows s to select the object by pressing TAB. The integer number you type in Tab index field specifies the order in which objects are selected — tabbing starts with the lowest number and ends with the highest.
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 149
5.12 Lines Tab The Lines tab controls the object's line thickness and style. Property
Description
Width
The width of the line.
Style
The line’s style, such as dotted or dashed.
Arrows
Only applicable if the line has a start and an end. Specifies the type of “arrow” at the start and end of the line.
5.13 Options Tab The Options tab is only applicable to a chart object, and controls its major characteristics, such as its type (line, pie, etc.) and the rate at which it plots new values. Property
Description
Chart type
The type of chart. Currently, only Line Trend is ed. A line trend can have up to eight plots, each of which plots the values of a separate point parameter.
Axis
Specifies the colors used for the legend text and its background.
History type
The type of history, for example: 6 minute average.
Samples
The number of samples you want to display, up to 1000. Note that the larger the number of samples, the heavier the load on the server and the longer the time required to update the chart.
Units
Specifies whether samples are displayed as percentage values or as engineering units.
5.14 Popup Tab This tab only appears if you select Popup on the Behaviors Tab. Property
Description
File Name of Page to be displayed in Popup Window
The filename of the popup display that appears when a clicks the object.
Initial Position
Determines the initial position of the popup when it is called up. Select Position on parent display if you want to specify the coordinates of the top-left corner of the popup. You can either type the Left and Top coordinates, or click Set Position and then click in the display to mark the position. Select Determine automatically if you want Station to determine the initial position.
8 - 150 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
5.15 Acronyms Note! This function is not ed by the Experion PKS with PMD Controller system. An acronym describes the meaning of a parameter's state (or integer value). For example, the acronyms "Stopped" and "Running" are much more meaningful in displays than the raw parameter values "0" and "1". The default acronym file contains acronyms suitable for most purposes. Acronyms in this file are divided into two ranges: •
System. Pre-defined, which include commonly required acronyms. System acronyms are stored in records 1 to 2048.
•
-defined. Stored in records 2881 to 3880. You define acronyms in Station.
Related acronyms are stored as contiguous records in the order that corresponds to the states of a parameter. The following example shows how the four states of a parameter correspond to a set of four acronyms — Stopped to Fast. (When selecting a set of acronyms, you specify the record of the first acronym and the number of acronyms required — see 5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms.
Custom Acronyms You can create custom acronym files — the main advantage is that custom acronyms can be more than 10 characters long. For details about creating custom acronyms, see Using Custom Acronyms in the Display Building Guide.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 151
5.15.1 Selecting Acronyms Related acronyms are stored as contiguous records in the order corresponding to the parameter values. To select a set of acronyms, you specify the record of the first acronym, as well as the number of acronyms required. To select default acronyms: 1. Select Acronym in Display as and file in Source. 2. Specify the values of the other properties as appropriate. Property
Description
Start the acronym
The record that contains the first acronym.
Number of acronyms
The number of acronyms you want to use.
Preview
If you are on the server, the selected acronyms appear in this box.
To select custom acronyms: 1.
Select Acronym in Display as and file in Source.
2.
Specify the values of the other properties as appropriate.
Property
Description
File
The file that contains the custom acronyms.
Start at record
The record that contains the first acronym.
Number of acronyms
The number of acronyms you want to use.
Start at word
The word that contains the first acronym.
Length of acronyms
The length of the acronyms.
Location
Specifies how the acronyms are stored within the file:
Preview
•
Consecutive records
•
Single record, where the acronyms are stored in consecutive words within the same record.
If you are on the server, the selected acronyms appear in this box.
5.16 Sorting tab The Sorting tab is only applicable to alarm and event tables and the table object. It specifies how alarms/events are sorted. To learn about alarm and event tables, see 5.18 About alarm and event tables.
8 - 152 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Sort by this column
These properties specify up to three levels of sorting instructions for alarms/events that appear in the table. For example, you might want to sort alarms by Priority (select Descending to list the highest priority alarms first) and then by Date & Time (select Descending to list the newest alarm first).
Then by
At each level, select a column (alarm/event item) and the order in which alarms/events are sorted. Note: You can sort by a column even if it does not appear in the table. (The Data tab specifies which columns are visible.) For example, you may want the most recent alarm to appear at the top of the table even though the Alarm Time column is not visible.
5.17 About vector graphic objects Vector graphic objects are "line-based" objects such as rectangles and curves. The following objects are vector graphic objects. Arc
Polygon
Rounded Rectangle
Bezier Curve
PolyLine
Textbox
Line
Rectangle
Wedge
Oval The following table lists specialized editing tasks you can perform on vector graphic objects. Task: 3.3.2 Creating a new object from overlapping objects. 3.14 Combining objects to improve display performance. 3.16 Using the Node Editor.
5.18 About alarm and event tables An alarm table lists alarms in a manner similar to the Alarm Summary. An event table lists events in a manner similar to the Event Summary. The properties you can specify when creating an alarm or event table include: •
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The types of alarms/events that are shown (For example, you may only want to show urgent alarms for a particular area.) EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 153
•
The details that are shown (date/time, description, priority and so on), and the order in which they appear across the table
•
Whether there are horizontal and vertical scrollbars
Typical alarm table
Note: •
Unlike an alarm table, an event table does not show events as soon as they occur (subject to the display's refresh rate). Instead, it shows events stored in the SQL events database, which is updated from the "live" system database at 30second intervals. This means that the most recent event in an event table will be at least 30 seconds old.
•
By default, the event table has its event time filter set to "TODAY", which means only those events that are generated on the same day are displayed. The "TODAY" event time filter shows events stored in the SQL events database, which is updated from the "live" system database at 30-second intervals.
•
When you create an alarm or event table in HMIWeb Display Builder, its appearance does not closely reflect its appearance in Station. For example, there is only one "column" regardless of how many columns you actually specify.
Typical alarm or event table as it appears in HMIWeb Display Builder
5.19 About trends A trend object presents information in a graphical manner, and can be configured in numerous ways. Notes: Some of the features described here can only be accessed using scripts. The Properties Window only allows you to configure a chart's basic properties. Currently, you can only create line and bar trends in HMIWeb Display Builder. If you want to create another type of chart, such as pie or tuning, you must use Display Builder. 8 - 154 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
A trend includes the following main components: •
Chart area. The data display area.
•
Axis. The rulers and legends of the x/y axes.
•
Toolbar. The toolbar above the chart area.
•
Legend. The tabular area below the chart area.
5.19.1 Chart area A trend can display up to 32 plots, each of which can be separately configured. You can also configure the view's appearance such as the background and grid colors.
Samples and sample intervals For the x-axis, the minimum sample interval is 1 second. (The maximum sample interval is 24 hours.)
Plot ToolTips When a moves the pointer over a plot, a ToolTip shows the value of the plot at that point, as shown in the following figures. With scripting, you can include a suitable prefix to the value, as shown in the figure on the right.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 155
Reference line and reference values When a clicks in the Plot View a vertical reference line appears. The placement of the reference line depends on whether snap to value is set. If snap to value is set, the reference line is placed to nearest value. If snap to value is not set, the reference line es through the point marked by the click. Also, when the moves the pointer over the reference line, a ToolTip appears which shows its date/time. With scripting, you use the OnReferenceCursorSet to obtain the reference values. A reference value is the value (and date/time) of a plot where it intersects the reference line. (The value is calculated using linear interpolation between the two adjacent samples.) If the Legend is visible, the reference values are shown in the Legend grid.
Event bar and data tips If the Event Summary is visible with the trend, an event bar is added to the bottom of the chart area. The event bar contains icons to indicate when an event occurred. A data tip appears when a clicks on an event symbol. To remove the data tip a clicks on the event symbol again. If a different symbol is clicked, the data tip displayed is for the new event symbol. Only one data tip can be visible at a time. If multiple events occurred in the region of the event symbol then arrow buttons appear in the data tip. These arrow buttons allow s to scroll through the events that occurred at that time.
Zoom function A can zoom into a particular part of the trend by dragging diagonally across the area of interest, as shown in the following figure. When the releases the mouse button, the trend zooms into the rectangle marked by the pointer. 8 - 156 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
The returns the trend to its normal scale by clicking the button.
Invalid data If the trend receives invalid data, it discontinues the plot until valid data is again received, as shown in the following figure.
5.19.2 Axis By default, the Axis View includes the axis marker labels. With scripting, you can also include axis labels.
Labels with multiple plots Each plot on a trend can have its own axis and marker labels (as well as other properties such as range and number of samples). However, only the labels for the first plot in a trend are displayed. The ranges of the other plots are automatically scaled to fit the y-axis. Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
EPKS Object Properties • 8 - 157
5.19.3 Toolbar A trend can include toolbars so that s can manipulate the trend. With the toolbar, s can: •
Change the scale
•
Change the line plot to a bar graph for a single point
•
Show or hide the Event Summary
•
Show or hide the Legend
•
Show or hide numeric history
•
Zoom
•
Change the time period
With scripting, you use the SetXAxisToolbarItemVisible method to specify what items are available on the toolbar.
5.19.4 Legend The Legend provides more detailed information about the points that are included in the trend. The legend can be provided in two forms, a full legend or a mini legend. The mini legend contains the pen check box, point ID, and parameter. In addition to these items, the full legend also contains the point description, low scale, high scale, current value, reference value and engineering units. If the toolbar is visible on the trend, s have the option to show or hide the legend. If the trend also includes events or includes numeric history, then only the mini legend can be included.
8 - 158 • EPKS Object Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
6
Display Properties
6.1
Display Properties – overview You access the properties of the current display (Display, Popup, Dynamic Shape or Shape Sequence) through the Properties window. You can call up the Properties window
6.2
•
by double-clicking the plain display area.
•
by clicking the Properties window button on the View toolbar. Note! If any object is selected, select Edit / Deselect All to get the Properties window for the display.
•
by right-clicking the plain display area and selecting Edit Properties from the menu opened.
Appearance Tab The Appearance tab contains properties that define the background details and size of the display.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 159
Property
Description
Background
Image / Browse – Opens a dialog box which you use to browse a background image for the display. You can enter a file name with or without its path. If the whole path is not entered, the background image is searched for in the directory in which the display file is saved. The following picture formats are ed: bmp, jpg, jpeg, ico, wmf, and emf. If you set a background image it overrides the background color. Color of the display background. Style - A style from the style sheet specified in Stylesheet
6.3
Size
The Width and Height of the display, expressed in pixels.
Style
Stylesheet - The style sheet used by the display.
Callup Task Tab
The Callup Task tab specifies the task that is performed whenever the display is called up. A task is any of the standard server programs or an application program. If you want to perform the task at regular intervals while the display is visible, use the Periodic Task Tab. Property
Description
Request task on page callup
Select this checkbox to specify a callup task.
Details
The task details, including its LRN (task identifier), parameters and the security level required to perform the task. If you select Add station number offset to LRN, a separate task is performed on each Station. (The number of the task performed on a particular station is equal to the sum of the specified LRN and the Station’s number.)
8 - 160 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
6.4
Custom Properties Tab
This Custom Properties Tab is only applicable to a dynamic shape (a display, which type is Dynamic Shape). You use this tab to define a dynamic shape's custom properties. For a description of custom properties and for details how to use this tab, see 2.5 Creating a Dynamic Shape.
6.5
Details Tab
Property
Description
Display Refresh rate {seconds}
By default, Station updates all displays at a standard rate, typically once every five seconds. This option allows you to specify a slower rate for the display. (If the display is particularly complex, slowing the refresh rate will reduce the load on your system.)
Zooming allowed
If this check box is cleared, operators cannot zoom in/out on the display
Multi window
SafeView window category Single use application set Application set name
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 161
Property
Description
Allow display callup for
Only applicable if areas have been defined for your system. Specifies which areas can call up the display. All areas - The default selection, which does not restrict access to the display. Only area - Restricts access to the specified area. Area defined by File / Word - Restricts access to the area specified by the file/word combination. (In general, these fields are used only by Honeywell personnel.)
6.6
6.7
General Tab
Property
Description
Title
The display's title that appears in the Station Title Bar (and in the Display Summary page if it is a numbered display) Or the title of a popup, shape sequence or dynamic shape.
Description
Any notes or comments about a display, popup, shape sequence or dynamic shape.
Use first shape for bad value
Only applicable to a shape sequence. If selected, Station displays the first shape if the associated point no longer exists.
Help Tab The Help tab specifies the help associated with the display. Station s can call up the help by pressing the help key or selecting a menu item. (Each Station must be configured so that s can access the help. For details, see Server and Client Configuration Guide.) You can specify either:
6.7.1
•
A topic within a HTML Help file. HTML files have a “chm” extension — see 6.7.1 Specifying a Topic in a HTML Help File.
•
A document such as a HTML file or Microsoft Word document — see 6.7.2 Specifying Help Other Than HTML Help.
Specifying a Topic in a HTML Help File You specify a topic within a HTML Help file using either its topic number or its internal filename.
8 - 162 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
You can create HTML Help using a variety of help authoring tools, including Microsoft HTML Help Workshop, which you can from Microsoft’s Web site.
6.7.2
Property
Description
Help file name
The HTML Help filename, including its chm extension. If the file is not in one of Station’s display folders, you must include the full pathname.
Help file type
Automatically set to HTML Help when you specify the chm extension.
Help Topic Note! This property is not ed by the PMD system.
The help topic, which can be specified using either its: •
Internal filename. Set Locate topic by to Topic file and specify the filename of the topic in Topic file.
•
Number. Set Locate topic by to Topic number and specify the number in Topic number.
Specifying Help Other Than HTML Help You specify help, other than HTML Help by typing its filename. (Typical help documents include HTML pages and Word documents.)
Property
Description
Help file name
The filename of the document, including its extension. If the file is not in one of Station’s display folders, you must include the full pathname.
Help file type
6.8
Automatically set to Ordinary document if its extension is not chm.
Keys Tab You can assign a range of common commands to the PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN keys, as well as the softkeys. A softkey is a function key whose action is defined for each page rather than being fixed for the Station.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 163
6.9
Property
Description
Key
A key and the associated action it performs when pressed.
Action
To assign an action to a key, select the key from the list and then the action. Repeat for each key as required.
Periodic Task Tab The Periodic Task tab specifies the task that is performed at regular intervals while the display is visible. (A task is any of the standard server programs or an application program.) If you only want to perform the task when the display is called up, use the Callup Task Tab. For details about the Server Display Program (also known as "LRN 21"), see the Server and Client Configuration Guide. For details about application programs, see the Application Development Guide.
8 - 164 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Property
Description
Request task periodically
Select this checkbox to specify a periodic task.
Details
The task details, including its LRN (task identifier), parameters and the security level required to perform the ask. If you select Add station number offset to LRN, a separate ask is performed on each Station. (The number of the task performed on a particular station is equal to the sum of the pacified LRN and the Station’s number.)
Request every
The request interval, specified in display update intervals. (By default, Station updates all displays at the same rate, typically every five seconds. However, you can specify a longer interval in Refresh rate on the General tab.)
6.10 PMD Blocks
For instructions see section 4.7 PMD Blocks Tab.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 165
6.11 PMD General Note! The PMD General Tab appears in the Display Properties window after you have configured one or more PMD objects for the display.
Note! When you select the Rename function in the Task field, the New name field appears instead of the Replace and With fields. Property
Description
Page name
The automatically formed display / popup specific name.
Department
Shows the name of the PMD department being configured.
Process Area
The process area for the display.
Protection
The protection level for the display.
Display reference
Lists the display references.
Task
Replace: Replace all occurrences of characters given in Replace field with characters in With field in the selected names. Rename: Selected names will be replaced. Use wildcard? to keep the old character. More information about Replace and Rename functions: see sections 4.7.2 and 4.7.3.
8 - 166 • Display Properties
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
6.12 Shortcut Menu Tab
Property
Description
Show Default shortcut menu
Uses the default menu for a display, sysdefault_sm.xml.
Show Customized shortcut menu
Uses the specified custom menu.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Display Properties • 8 - 167
7
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
7.1
Setting HMIWeb Display Builder’s Options (Tools / Options) This chapter describes how to set up various HMIWeb Display Builder options. It also describes keyboard and menu shortcuts. To configure the options, select Tools / Options to see the Options window and then specify the options on each tab:
7.1.1
•
General Tab
•
Grids and Rulers Tab
•
Shapes Tab
General Tab
8 - 168 • Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Option
Description
Default scripting language
Specifies the default scripting language. Either VBScript or JScript.
Number of Undo/Redo Levels
Specifies the maximum number of undos/redos that you can perform. See 3.19 Undoing Your Work. Note: HMIWeb Display Builder’s memory requirements may exceed your computer’s capabilities if you specify too large a number.
Recently used file list
Specifies the number of recently used files HMIWeb Display Builder lists under the File menu.
Save AutoRecover info every
If this option is selected, the “autorecover” version of any open display is saved at the specified frequency. If HMIWeb Display Builder crashes, it asks you whether you want to open the autorecover version when you restart it.
Change mouse cursor when over a selectable object
If this option is selected, the cursor changes from to when move over a selectable/editable object. (The mouse pointer will not change if, for example, you move it over a locked object.) You should consider deselecting this option if you are working on a complex display. (The extra processing involved in determining whether an object is selectable can affect performance.)
Show Intellisense autocompletion list in script editor
If you select this option, you activate the Script Editor's Intellisense feature. (IntelliSense displays information in lists and pop-ups as you write your code. For example, it displays the available properties, methods and events of objects.)
Archive file format
The file format used when saving a display in archive format. Use the default file format (Text) unless you have a specific need to use Binary.
Save unarchived copy of file with archive files
If you select this option, two versions of a display are saved each time you save it in archive format: Archive (*.hda or *.hsa) Standard (*.htm or *.sha) Note that if you save a display in standard format, an archive version is not saved.
7.1.2
Grids and Rulers Tab
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder • 8 - 169
Option
Description
Horizontal spacing Vertical spacing
The horizontal and vertical spacing, in pixels, of gridlines, expressed in pixels. The grid makes it easier to arrange display objects in a neat and consistent manner.
Color
The color of the grid lines.
Snap objects to grid
If this option is selected, objects automatically align to the grid when you create, move or resize them. button on the View toolbar You can also use the to turn this option on/off.
Show grid
If this option is selected, the grid is visible. You can also use the to show/hide the grid.
Show rulers
button on the View toolbar
If this option is selected, the rulers are visible. The rulers make it easier to arrange objects in a neat and consistent manner. You can also use the button on the View toolbar to show/hide the rulers.
7.1.3
Shapes Tab
Option
Description
Search for shape files in
This list specifies the folders HMIWeb Display Builder searches when looking for linked shapes. See below how to add a shape folder to the list. If a display includes a link to a shape that is not in a listed folder, the next time you open the display, HMIWeb Display Builder will replace the shape with a rectangle containing an error message ("Unable to load shape file …"). Similarly, if a display includes an embedded shape that is not in a listed folder, you cannot upgrade it. See 2.8 Upgrading an Embedded Shape.
8 - 170 • Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Option
Description
By default, insert into display
Specifies the default manner in which shapes are inserted into displays: Contents of shape file embeds a copy of the shape file in the display Link to shape file inserts a link to the shape file Note that when you insert a shape, you can override the default by selecting other option in the Insert Shape dialog box.
To add a shape folder to the list: 1. Click Add to add a blank line to the list. 2. Either type the folder’s full path, or click the and browse for the folder.
button
3. If necessary, use the and buttons to rearrange the order of folders in the list. HMIWeb Display Builder searches through the folders in the order listed.
7.2
Creating a Toolbar (Tools / Customize) You can create your own toolbars that only contain the tools/menus you want. To create a toolbar: 1. Select Tools / Customize to open the Customize dialog box. 2. Click New on the Toolbars tab to open the New Toolbar dialog box. 3. Type the toolbar’s name and click OK. An empty, small toolbar appears on the HMIWeb Display Builder window and the name of the toolbar appears in list of the Customize dialog box. 4. Click the Command tab in the Customize dialog box. 5. Select a category that contains items (icons or menus) you want to include in your toolbar. 6. Drag each item to your toolbar. (This copies the item to your toolbar — it doesn’t delete it from the original toolbar.) 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for items in other categories. As with the other toolbars, you can show/hide your toolbar and drag it to a convenient place.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder • 8 - 171
7.3
Keyboard Shortcuts Command
Shortcut
Align the left edges of selected objects
CTRL+Q
Align (horizontally) the centers of selected objects
CTRL+W
Align the right edges of selected objects
CTRL+E
Align the top edges of selected objects
CTRL+1
Align (vertically) the middle of selected objects
CTRL+2
Align the bottom edges of selected objects
CTRL+3
Bring selected object to top of stack
CTRL+PAGE UP
Bring selected object one layer up (towards the top of) the stack
SHIFT+PAGE UP
Copy selected object to the clipboard
CTRL+C
Create a new (standard) display
CTRL+N
Cut selected object to the clipboard
CTRL+X
Delete selected object
DELETE
Duplicate selected object
CTRL+D
Group selected objects
CTRL+G
Open a display
CTRL+O
Paste contents of clipboard into display
CTRL+V
Print current display
CTRL+P
Redo command that has been undone
CTRL+Y
Save current display
CTRL+S
Select all objects
CTRL+A
Send selected object to bottom of stack
CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Send selected object one layer down (towards the bottom of) the stack
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Show/hide Script Editor
CTRL+ENTER
Show/hide Properties window
ALT+ENTER
Undo action
CTRL+Z
Ungroup selected group
CTRL+U
8 - 172 • Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
7.4
Shortcut Menu If you right-click (press the right mouse button) on the display or object(s), a shortcut menu appears next to the mouse pointer.
Item
Description
Cut
Cut the selected object(s) to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected object(s) to the clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the clipboard near the center of the display. If Paste is gray, it means the clipboard is empty.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected object(s).
Delete
Deletes the selected object(s).
Arrange
Gives access to the same alignment and grouping functions as the 1.4.5 Arrange Toolbar.
Transformations
Gives access to the same transform functions as the 1.4.7 Transform Toolbar.
Edit Properties
Shows the Properties window.
Edit Script
Shows the Script Editor window.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder • 8 - 173
8
Distributing Displays
8.1
Display Storage Techniques You can use of the following storage techniques for your displays:
8.2
•
Centralized. All displays are stored on the server, and accessed by Stations as required
•
Distributed. Each Station has its own copies in a local folder. (This technique reduces communication traffic and callup delays because Stations can show the displays without having to first them.)
Distribution Issues Unless you create displays on the server and use the centralized storage technique, you need to copy them to the appropriate computer(s) and check that they work correctly. Issue
Notes
Shapes and popups
Shapes and popups are linked to the displays, not embedded in them. This means that you also have to copy these files. You have to copy linked shapes and popups to folders that are ed in Station. (When asked to call up a display, Station only searches the ed folders.)
Associated folders
Each display (and shape/popup) has an associated folder that contains various files and graphics. These folders have the same name as the display, but with a “_files” extension. Copying a display will also cause the associated folder to be copied.
8 - 174 • Distributing Displays
Point IDs and database links
Check that all dynamic objects in a display show the correct data — when configuring an object, it is easy to mistype a point ID or database address.
DSP displays
If you are also distributing DSP displays, refer to the Display Building Guide for the distribution details — the procedures are slightly different.
Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Building Guide 01/2009
Related Documents 171j1w
Hmiwebdisplaybuildingguide Eng 5m3d44
April 2022 0
Neufert - Eng. 6f6h4v
August 2021 0
Prumychild Eng 6f496n
January 2022 0
Acsr - Eng 363mi
October 2020 0
Eng Molistic 5v5p23
March 2023 0